JP7201035B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines , shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, for example, there are some that aim to increase the interest of the player in the game by providing a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage.

JP-A-2006-000392

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first entering means. A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball means, and a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means. A privilege advantageous to the player based on the second determination means to be executed and the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination being the predetermined first determination result. a privilege game executing means for executing a game , a first position at which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball difficult to enter into the second ball entering means; a second position, a variable means that can be changed, and a first control based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition , and a game ball enters the second ball entering means rather than the first control a second control that variably controls the variable means so as to make it difficult to perform control execution means for executing one of a plurality of controls including at least a plurality of controls, and a predetermined set condition being satisfied, the first control game state setting means for setting a first game state in which a a third determining means for determining whether the counter value of the specific counter is a predetermined value based on the establishment of the determining condition ; A game state in which the second control is executed in a game state in which the possibility of the privilege game being executed is lower than that in the first game state, based on the fact that the counter value of the counter is determined to be the predetermined value. and a game state changing means for changing to a second game state, wherein the game machine changes from the first game state to the When the game state is changed to the second game state, even if the game ball enters the first ball entering means while the specific condition is satisfied after the change, the first determination is performed. It is a configuration in which the determination result of the second determination is displayed without the determination result being displayed, and the game state is changed from the first game state to the first game state by the game state changing means under a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied. When the game state is changed to the 2-game state, the determination result of the first determination can appear when a game ball enters the first ball-entering means after the change.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a game ball can enter a first ball entering means, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game to the first ball entering means. A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the entry of a ball, and a second determination for executing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second entry means. means, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination becoming a predetermined first determination result. a game executing means, a first position at which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means; and a second position at which a game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means. , and a first control based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, so that the game ball is less likely to enter the second ball entering means than the first control. a second control that variably controls the variable means; a control execution means that executes one of a plurality of controls including at least; game state setting means for setting a first game state, update means capable of periodically updating the counter value of a specific counter related to the game at least in the first game state, and a predetermined determination condition being established. a third discriminating means for discriminating whether the counter value of the specific counter is a predetermined value ; A second game which is a game state in which the possibility of the privilege game being executed is lower than that in the first game state and a game state in which the second control is executed based on the fact that the predetermined value is determined . and a game state changing means for changing the game state, wherein the game machine changes from the first game state to the second game state by the game state changing means under a situation where a predetermined specific condition is established. When the change is made, even if a game ball enters the first ball entering means while the specific condition is satisfied after the change, the determination result of the first determination appears. The second game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state by the game state changing means under a situation where the specific condition is not established. When the game ball is entered into the first ball entering means after the change, the determination result of the first determination can appear.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view along Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (a)-(b) are rear views of a part of the variable winning device. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of operation|movement of a flow-path solenoid, and operation|movement of an opening-and-closing board in 1 round of a jackpot. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ready-to-win effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the special super ready-to-win effect, which is one aspect of the ready-to-win effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when entering the chance mode A, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the chance mode A is finished. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is the first hit random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol It is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship, (c) is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter C2 in the first embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and the hit in the normal design, (b) is a small hit type counter in the first embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship with the small hit classification in a C5 and a special design. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for consecutive villas/chance B in the first embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a table for chance A in the first embodiment; It is a schematic diagram shown. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the game state in 1st Embodiment. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. be. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design fluctuation|variation stop process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the chance mode setting process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design fluctuation|variation stop process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing variation monitoring processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fraud monitoring processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the modification of the first embodiment, (b) is for normal (with special figure 2 pending) in the modification of the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for consecutive villas/chance B (latter half) in the modification of the first embodiment, and (b) is a chance table in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for A (latter half). It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a chance A time selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the modification of the first embodiment, (b) is a main control in the modification of the first embodiment 10 is a flowchart showing normal selection processing executed by an MPU in the device; 10 is a flow chart showing continuous residence selection processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the modified example of the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table in the second embodiment. be. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the game state update process 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, (b) is the first hit random number counter C1 in the third embodiment and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol It is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the correspondence, (c) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the third embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the corresponding relationship between the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit determination value in the special symbol in the third embodiment, (b) is a variation pattern in the third embodiment 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario table; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) and (b) are front views of a sorting unit in a fourth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the fourth embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 in the fourth embodiment and the hit in the normal symbol. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal table in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for the probability variation addition time in the fourth embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the fourth embodiment It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a falling lottery table in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in the fourth embodiment. . It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the game state after the end of the jackpot in the fourth embodiment and the transition of the variation pattern table to be referred to. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation start process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation stop process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation start process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation stop process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal design fluctuation|variation process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot completion|finishing process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and ball entrances 64, 640, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of game balls detected may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the second ball-entering hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. 13 is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13, and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a starting port and the like are arranged and the shot ball is area). In addition, the game area includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the prize winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is conducted, and the ball enters the normal entrance. When 67 is passed, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is carried out. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). ) is opened, and the opening is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) corresponding to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot types of special symbols, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided. (game value) is given to the player. The four types of "jackets A to D" are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The two types of jackpots E and F” are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 . Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the lottery that is executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as "first special symbol lottery", and the ball will enter the second ball. A lottery that is executed when a ball enters the mouth 640 is called a "second special symbol lottery".

When the lottery for the special design (first design) is performed, the variable display of the special design is started in the first design display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each game is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is carried out. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the success or failure determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern hits, the second ball entrance 640 is opened by changing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.9 seconds or 1 second). be released. It should be noted that normally, the second ball entrance 640 is closed because the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the lottery result is displayed. The normal pattern is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. It is displayed and also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

As described above, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols. When "jackpot A" and "jackpot E" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16-round jackpot). On the other hand, when "jackpot B" and "jackpot C" are reached, the number of rounds is 12 rounds (12-round jackpot) in a special game state, and when "jackpot D" and "jackpot F" are reached, the number of rounds is both. becomes a 4-round special game state (4-round jackpot). Further, when a specific condition is satisfied during a jackpot game (when a ball passes through a V winning switch 65e3, which will be described later), the game shifts to a special pattern high probability state (during probability change of special patterns) after the jackpot ends. When the high-probability state of the special design is provided, the high-probability state of the special design continues from the end of the big win until the 100th variation of the special design is completed (until the 101st variation is started). . Although the details will be described later, the jackpots A and B and the jackpots E and F are configured so that the ball can easily pass through the V prize switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the jackpots C and D, it is difficult for the ball to pass through the V prize switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Therefore, rather than the lottery of the first special symbols in which the big wins C and D can be determined, the second special symbol in which either the big wins E or F (that is, the big win in which the ball easily passes through the V prize switch 65e3) is determined. The lottery is advantageous for the player.

In addition, after the completion of the jackpots other than "jackpot D" among the above jackpots, as an added value after the jackpot ends, the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased after the jackpot is finished, and the second special pattern fluctuates. less time. This state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased continues until the variation of the special symbol ends 100 times (until the variation of the 101st time starts) after the end of the big win. As a result, the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be easily executed. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player. In addition, in the normal state of the normal design, basically the variation time of the second special symbol (10 minutes) is much longer than the variation time of the first special symbol (7 seconds to 90 seconds). Therefore, if the game is played aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in the normal state of the normal symbols, the game efficiency is remarkably lowered, so the game can be played aiming at the first ball entrance 64.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is up, the so-called "special symbol high probability state" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state It is a game state that easily shifts to (jackpot). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "time saving state of normal design" (high probability state of normal design) means that the winning probability of normal design is increased and the fluctuation time of the second special design is shortened, and the lottery of the second special design is executed. It refers to the easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal design", it is called "normal state of normal design" (low probability state of normal design), which means that the probability of winning normal design is normal, that is, during time saving Indicates a low probability of winning.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the special symbol definite variable period. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as time-shortening of normal symbols.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is varied according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common (for example, all 8 rounds) for all jackpot types. Further, for example, the period during which the "time-saving state of normal symbols" is changed may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the ``time-saving state of normal symbols'' is reached, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or the electric accessory is released for one normal symbol. It is also possible to change the number of times. In addition, in this embodiment, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big win, the "special symbol high probability state" is maintained until the special symbol changes 100 times after the big win ends. , The probability variation period of the special symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Also, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by turning on the power, etc., it is always set to the "low probability state of special symbols". After that, when a big win other than the big win D occurs and the ball does not pass through the V prize switch 65e3 during the big win, the ``normal state of the normal pattern'' is shifted to the ``time-saving state of the normal pattern''. In this case, the set "time-saving state of normal symbols" is continued until the variable display of special symbols is completed 100 times after the end of the big win. If a new special pattern does not become a big win before the lottery of 100 times of special patterns is completed after the special pattern becomes a big win, the game returns to the ``normal state of normal patterns''. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously execute the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol (simultaneous variation method is adopted. there). Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the 100th special symbol variable display is being executed in the time saving state, the other special symbol may be randomly selected and the variable display may be started. In this case, it is configured such that the time saving state is terminated when the lottery condition for the special symbols for the 101st time in total is established after the time saving state is set. As a result, when a relatively long variation time (for example, 90 seconds) is selected as the variation time for the 100th variation display, a short variation time is continuously selected in the lottery for the other special symbol, It is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem of substantially increasing the number of times of time saving.

While the "normal pattern time saving state" is continuing, if a new jackpot type other than the jackpot D occurs, the "normal pattern time saving state" will be further expanded to 100 times of special patterns after the new jackpot. This continues until the variable display ends.

It should be noted that the probability variable state of the special symbol is the same, and when the lottery condition of the 101st special symbol is established during the execution of the variable display based on the lottery of the 100th special symbol among the 100 times of the probability variable state , At that time, the probability variation state is terminated, and it is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the 101st special symbol lottery from becoming highly probable.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). A small hit is provided that is opened until it is done). Since this small win is a type of loss, the game state is not changed, but the second special symbol is displayed over a predetermined number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times) after the small win is completed. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display associated with the lottery is shortened (to 3 seconds). As described above, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely long (600 seconds), so if you continue to launch the ball aiming at the second ball entrance 640, the game efficiency will be extremely deteriorated. , which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, after the small hit is completed, by shortening the fluctuation time over the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, the ball can be launched aiming at the second ball entrance 640 during the predetermined number of times to achieve the second special. Lottery of patterns can be easily executed. That is, the state is advantageous for the player for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), which is the game state in which the player stays the longest in the game, the game can be played in anticipation of a small win. In addition, since it is possible to shift to an advantageous state without going through a big win, it is possible to add contrast to the game in the normal state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the following description, the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is set a predetermined number of times, is likely to be executed after the small hit is called "chance mode A". On the other hand, among the states in which "chance mode A" is not set, the special symbol low probability state and the normal symbol normal state are "normal mode", the special symbol low probability state, and The time-saving state of normal symbols is called "chance mode B", and the high-probability state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols is called "Continuous Mode".

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters. The number of times is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot, an error display, and the like. The LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and the combination of the emitted colors enables various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (high-probability state of special symbols) to be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates the big hit if the big hit is a special symbol corresponding to the big hit A to D. (first pattern) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 8(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) is rare. In most cases, when the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all because the player quits the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the new ball is entered. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image. A third pattern is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with different types of special symbols (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) that are likely to be drawn according to the game state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed in the current gaming state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery, which is difficult to be drawn in the current gaming state, is executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a total of three main patterns of the third pattern different from the main pattern displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed in the right small area Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy wearing a headband in this embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character performs a specific action. A notice effect is performed by appearing or the like.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variation display based on the first special symbol lottery is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and , When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is being performed, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is It is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the pattern displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 (first reserved ball number pattern) indicates the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64, and the pattern displayed in the lower half (second Retained ball number pattern) indicates the number of retained balls for the second ball entrance 640 . FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all second reserved symbols are blank).

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the ready-to-win effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing an example of a ready-to-win effect. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the main symbols having the same number are displayed stationary on the effective line L1 of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed. When it is in the state of being there, the characters "Reach!!" are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that a ready-to-win state (a chance that the main symbols with the same number are aligned on the activated line L1) has occurred.

In the present embodiment, as a mode of the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect occurs, a normal reach with a short variable time and a low expectation that the same main symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (a big win), and a long variable time. , and super reach with a high expectation that the same main symbols are aligned on the activated line L1 (a big win).

Next, with reference to FIG. 9B, the display mode of the special super reach in this embodiment will be described. This special super reach is one aspect of the above-described super reach, and is a aspect that can be selected only when the lottery result of the special symbol results in a specific lottery result. Specifically, the most disadvantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 4 rounds, the ball is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3, and the time saving state is not given), or the most advantageous jackpot type (chance mode This special super reach is selected only when A becomes a small win C) set 100 times.

FIG. 9(b) shows a display mode when special super ready-to-win is selected and after the ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 9(a)) is executed, the speed of the medium symbol row Z2 displayed in a variable manner is reduced. It is the figure which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 9(a), in the special super reach, the eyes of the boy character displayed in the small area Ds2 are flaming like fire, and the words "great chance" are displayed in the small area Ds3. A speech bubble with is displayed inside appears. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that there is a high possibility that the current variable display indicates a lottery result that is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the special super reach, the symbols scrolled from top to bottom at a low speed in the middle symbol row Z2 are the symbols with the letters "chance mode" and the symbols with the number indicating the reach. There are only 2 types. Here, the symbol to which "chance mode" is added means a transition to chance mode A, and when it is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, it becomes a small win C, and 100 times after the small win is completed. chance mode A is set.

Even if the jackpot D is reached, the number of prize balls is small, and neither the variable probability state nor the time-saving state is given after the jackpot, so the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, when it comes to the small win C, after the small win C ends, the chance mode A is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed over a maximum of 100 times of fluctuation display, so that the player can win 100. You can receive almost the same profit as when a short period of time is set. Therefore, when the special super reach is executed, it is possible to play the game hoping for a small win C rather than a big win D.

In a general pachinko machine, when the variable display is executed, the game is played with the expectation that the third symbols with the same number will be aligned (that is, a big win), but the pachinko of the present embodiment In the machine 10, when the special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the performance result in hope that the third symbols with the same number are not aligned. In other words, it is possible to provide novel game characteristics that the game can be played in anticipation of a loss (small win C) with a high degree of advantage rather than a big win (big win D) with a small degree of advantage.

FIG. 10(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the display when a symbol with the characters "chance mode" is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. As shown in FIG. 10(a), when the pattern indicating the shift to chance mode A (the pattern with the characters "chance mode") is stopped and displayed, "Chance mode GET!! Hit right!! ” appears in the small area Ds3. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the game has been switched to the chance mode. In addition, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the player should hit right (a game method in which a ball is hit on the path on the right side of the game board 13 and aimed at the second ball entrance 640). In addition, a substantially rectangular display area with characters "100 times left" is displayed at the lower left of the small area Ds3. This display area indicates the remaining number of lotteries in the chance mode A, and the number of times displayed is decremented by one each time a change is started. This display area allows the player to easily understand the number of remaining lotteries in the chance mode A.

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the number of lotteries set as the chance mode A is completed. As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the chance mode A ends, a speech balloon with the words "Chance mode finished... Return to left-handed shooting!" is displayed in the small area Ds3. . As a result, the player is informed that the chance mode A has ended and that the player should hit left (a game method in which a ball is launched into the path on the left side of the game board 13 and aimed at the first ball entrance 64). can be easily understood.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery that is performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are displayed. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“○” symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 is achieved. The number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. . Four second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of balls that pass through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, as in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is 3 times or less, or , 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. When the ball is hit to the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front (so-called left-handed hitting), the ball can be easily entered into the first ball entrance 64 . In addition, although the rate of hitting the ball is lower than when hitting the ball to the left, when the ball is hit along the path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front (so-called hitting the ball to the right), may enter the ball.

A second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 in a front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. As shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side. Easier to enter. Therefore, in order to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, it is basically necessary to hit the ball to the right. It should be noted that although the rate of entering the ball is lower than that of right-handed hitting, even if a left-handed hitting ball flows down to the right side of the first ball-entering hole 64, it is possible to enter the second ball-entering hole 640. have a nature.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won). In other words, the opening/closing plate 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot hits, allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 0.5 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won) even when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit.

Also, inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which balls can pass are provided. A game ball that has flowed into the inside of the variable winning device 65 flows down through one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a V winning switch 65e3 that gives a high probability state (probability variable state) of special symbols after a big hit by passing a ball. This special discharge channel 65e2 is in a passable state only in the first round of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened), and the ball passes through the special discharge passage. The period during which 65e2 can flow down is made different according to the jackpot type.

More specifically, as the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot, the opening time is relatively short, and it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the opening/closing plate 65f1. Either an opening/closing operation (opening/closing pattern) or an opening/closing operation (opening/closing pattern) in which the opening period is relatively long and the ball can be easily entered into the specific winning hole 65a during the opening period of the opening/closing plate 65f1. , is set according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 7). During the opening period of the opening/closing plate 65f1, the ball can flow down the special discharge channel 65e2, so whether or not the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of the big win is paid attention to. You can play games. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous during the jackpot.

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is an opening forming member 65b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the variable winning device 65 is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c. It has an arranged LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing plate 65f1 for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The open/close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g protrude into the game. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, a rear surface cover body 65j arranged on the rear surface side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a rear surface of the rear surface cover body 65j. A flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the side to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 65j with screws. there is

FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. The specific winning hole 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 5(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6(b).

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the opening of the specific winning slot 65a is opened and closed by an open/close plate 65f1, which is composed of a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing plate 65f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning hole 65a.

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided toward the second ball entrance 640 side. is configured as Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the variable probability game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 while keeping the right-handed state, and immediately after the big win game, the left-handed game method. It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the Therefore, the player can play the game more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 65e to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by a V winning switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball provided in the special discharge channel 65e2, and is released to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. is discharged to

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability game state ( Probability variation gaming state) is set. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a variable probability gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability game state or the probability variation game state.

In this way, the game state set after the big win game is varied according to the downflow route of the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the big win game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 0.2 seconds at the shortest. there is As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time after the start of the big win. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, but in this embodiment, the switching member 65h operates for 3 seconds after the start of the first round of the jackpot, and the special discharge flow continues to the V winning switch 65e3. The path 65e2 becomes passable.

Next, referring to FIG. 6(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening of the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge channel 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all game balls that have entered the variable prize winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the V prize winning switch 65e3. Therefore, when trouble such as clogged balls occurs in the variable winning device 65, the trouble can be found early.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1. prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the V prize switch 65e3, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give the variable probability game state. can. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting the variable probability game state separately from the variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in one jackpot will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, by varying the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot according to the type of the jackpot, the easiness of the ball flowing down the specific discharge channel 65e2 can be varied. there is In this embodiment, two types of patterns (a pattern that makes it difficult to enter a ball into the specific winning hole 65a and a pattern that makes it easy to enter a ball) are provided as the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1.

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing time-measured changes in the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and time-measured changes in the opening and closing timings of the specific winning openings 65a for each jackpot type. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in an OFF state before one round of jackpot starts. That is, before the start of one round, the ball can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6(b)). This off state continues until one round starts. Then, when the first round is started, the channel solenoid 65k is set to the ON state for 3 seconds. That is, the state is such that the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A). When the ON state period of 3 seconds ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF state again and is kept OFF state until the big win ends.

Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, when one of the big wins C or D is achieved, the closed opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened when one round starts. A ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65 by opening the opening/closing plate 65f1. This open state lasts only 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have passed since the open/close plate 65f1 was opened, one round ends and the open/close plate 65f1 is kept closed until the second round starts after an interval period of 5 seconds. One round in this embodiment ends when 10 balls enter the specific winning hole 65a or three seconds elapse after the start of one round. Since it is very difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning hole 65a for 0.2 seconds, in many cases of the big hits C and D, the ball is made to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2. The jackpot ends without being able to do it. That is, since the ball cannot be passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big win, the probability variable state of the special symbol is not given after the big win. Therefore, when the jackpots C and D are reached, the game state after the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player compared to the other jackpot types. In addition, although the probability is low, if the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a during 0.2 seconds when the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened, it can be shifted to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the big win. can be done. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is either the jackpots C or D, the game can be played in anticipation that the variable probability state will be set after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when one of the jackpots A, B, E, and F is achieved, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened for three seconds after the start of the first round of jackpots. That is, the period during which the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on coincides with the period during which the open/close plate 65f1 is set to the open state. Therefore, the ball can be easily passed through the V winning switch 65e3 by entering the specific winning hole 65a during the relatively long open period. Therefore, in the case of jackpots A, B, E, and F, since the ball can easily pass through the V prize switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the ball can be launched toward the variable prize winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol.

Thus, in this embodiment, the easiness of shifting to the variable probability state is varied according to the jackpot type. As a result, the game can be played in anticipation of setting an opening/closing pattern that facilitates transition to the variable probability state.

In the present embodiment, the opening period of the opening/closing plate 65f1 set when the jackpots A, B, E, and F are achieved coincides with the ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k, but this is not the only option. not a thing For example, the ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k may be longer by a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). With this configuration, the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the open period of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is allowed to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the variable probability state is not given even though the ball is entered into the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not win any winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. - 特許庁The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (Fig. 3, 122). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small win) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). 1st winning type counter C2 used for , stop type counter C3 used for selecting stop type, variation type counter CS1 used for selecting variation pattern, and initial value setting of 1st random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In addition, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 46). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and each counter value to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. A second special symbol reserved ball storage 203b is provided. In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, so that a total of maximum eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol lottery is possible, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is set to the first value. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and when the game ball wins in the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic Various settings and control processing for displaying the image are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to variably display the second special symbol. Various settings and control processing are executed for this purpose.

On the other hand, during a period in which the special symbol lottery is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is placed in the first ball entrance 64. Alternatively, when winning the second ball entrance 640, if the number of pending balls for the winning ball entrance (starting hole) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value acquisition is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball entrance. Also, if the number of pending balls for the winning ball entrance is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value etc. is not acquired and prize balls (5 in this embodiment) Prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of held balls is set to four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is not limited to this, and is less than four (for example, 3), or more than 4 (eg, 8). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 299. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 46).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the RAM 203 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is specified in the jackpot random number table (see FIG. 13(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is If the value of the random number that becomes a big hit defined in the first winning random number table 202a matches, it is determined as a special symbol big win.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 13(b). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the game state is a low probability game state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0" in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If the result is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "1 to 4". If it is within the range of "1 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit. Furthermore, regardless of the game state, in the first special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "295 to 299", and the range of "295 to 299" is determined. If it is within, it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b must be a random number that becomes a small win. In other words, if it is a random number that will result in a small win of a special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one at the time of the small win of the special symbol.

On the other hand, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. If so, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. FIG. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. 202a. In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 300, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 1, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol is "1/300". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 300, the total number of random number numbers that become a big hit is 4, so the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/75".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13(c)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol is different from the symbol on which the ready-to-win is applied. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected, namely, "reach out" (for example, the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and "complete loss" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment). It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

It should be noted that, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and according to the table, the range of random numbers set for each stop type of out is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in the variable probability state of special symbols, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, and "completely out of reach" is likely to be selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, making it difficult to select "out of reach". In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. A low-probability table is selected, making it difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the "out of reach" stop type is widened to 80-99. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do.

Further, the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A to C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 46), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) storing a random number for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15(b) and 16). In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables dedicated to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively set, and variation pattern tables are set according to the result of winning/failure determination for each. there is Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16 .

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal starting opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and stored in the normal pattern execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is defined in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 14(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the value of the winning random number defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 14(a).

FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 199 random numbers that are normal symbols when the probability of normal symbols is low (during the normal state of normal symbols), and the range is "5 to 203". . Among the 240 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the total number of winning random numbers is 199, so the probability of winning the normal symbol is "199/240".

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high (during the time-saving state of normal symbols), there are 200 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204". The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". . In this way, in the present embodiment, since only one random number value to be a win for normal symbols differs between the low probability state for normal symbols and the high probability state for normal symbols, the winning probabilities are almost the same. there is In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 in the case of winning the normal symbols are also the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second ball entrance 640 is the same between the normal symbol low probability state and the normal symbol high probability state. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is the variation time in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol becomes extremely long. As a result, in the low-probability state (normal state) of the normal design, it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the second special design than in the high-probability state (time-saving state) of the normal design, so the low-probability state (normal state) of the normal design. , the player can be made to play a game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 .

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 3 seconds. Then, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of ``5 to 203'', it is determined that the winner is won, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second ball entrance 640 is opened for "0.9 seconds x 1 time". On the other hand, in the normal symbol high probability state, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second ball entrance 640 is opened "one second x once". Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially added by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol variation pattern is selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the whole range), and the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 46).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 46) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 45) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. FIG. FIG. 13(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In addition to the above-described first winning random number table 202a and second winning random number table 202c, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning type selection table 202b, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, and a small winning type selection table 202e. It is

First, with reference to FIG. 13(c), details of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13(c)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first hit type counter C2 is determined. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per one is selected.

As shown in FIG. 13(c), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is defined in association with "jackpot A". . This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot A", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds. See the lower part) is set, so it is easy to give a probability variable state after the big hit. Therefore, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player.

In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 49" in association with "jackpot B". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot with 12 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 counter values are "jackpot B". ratio is 40% (40/100). This "jackpot B" has a smaller number of rounds than the "jackpot A", but like the "jackpot A", the V prize switch 65e3 can (easily) be opened and closed in the first round of the jackpot. Since the pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set, it is easy to give the probability variable state after the big hit. Therefore, although inferior to "jackpot A" (and "jackpot E" to be described later), it is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous for the player.

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 69" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot with 12 rounds, like the "jackpot B". Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 20 counter values are the "jackpot C". ratio is 20% (20/100). This "jackpot C" has a smaller number of rounds than the "jackpot A", and in the first round of the jackpot, the opening and closing pattern of the specific prize winning port 65a that makes it difficult to pass the V prize switch 65e3 (see the middle of FIG. 7) is set. Therefore, it is difficult to give a variable probability state after a big hit (a time-saving state (chance mode B) of normal symbols is easily set after a big hit). For this reason, it becomes a disadvantageous jackpot type compared to "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" in which the variable probability state (continuous mode) is likely to be set.

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot with four rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 30 counter values become the "jackpot D", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 30% (30/100). This "jackpot D" has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of jackpot types, and the opening and closing pattern of the specific winning port 65a that makes it difficult to pass the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see the middle of FIG. 7) ) is set, it is difficult to give a variable probability state after a big hit (it is easy to set a time-saving state (chance mode B) of normal symbols after a big hit). For this reason, it becomes the most disadvantageous jackpot type among all the jackpot types.

On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 69" in association with "jackpot E". This "jackpot E" is a jackpot with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 70 counter values are the "jackpot E", so when the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot E" is determined. ratio is 70% (70/100). This "jackpot E" has the largest number of rounds among the six types of jackpot types, and the opening and closing pattern of the specific winning port 65a that can (easily) pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (Fig. 7 ) is set, so it is easy to give a probability variable state after a big hit. For this reason, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player, like the "jackpot A".

Further, for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "jackpot F". This "jackpot F" is a jackpot with four rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 30 counter values are the "jackpot F", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot F" is determined. ratio is 30% (30/100). This "jackpot F" has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of jackpot types, but in the first round of the jackpot, the opening and closing pattern of the specific winning port 65a that can (easily) pass through the V winning switch 65e3 ( See the lower part) is set, so it is easy to give a probability variable state after the big hit. Therefore, although it is disadvantageous in terms of prize balls, it is more advantageous than "big win C" and "big win D" because the next big win is likely to occur with a relatively small number of lotteries.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the opening/closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a is set so that the V winning switch 65e3 can (easily) pass through at a rate of 50%. The type of jackpot (jackpots A and B) is determined, whereas when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible (easy) to pass through the V prize switch 65e3 at a rate of 100%. The jackpot types (jackpots E, F) for which the opening/closing pattern of the winning opening 65a is set are determined. Therefore, once the renso mode (probability variable state of special symbols and time saving state of normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is performed by winning the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right. A state in which it is easy to be executed and a big win are likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with one purpose of shifting to the continuous mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the normal mode (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), the probability of being a big hit in the special symbol lottery is low, and basically the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute. , Aiming for a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol. However, even if the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the opening/closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) that allows easy passage of the V prize switch 65e3 is set only at a rate of 50%. The normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for a long time because the opening and closing pattern (see the middle part of FIG. 7) that makes it difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 continues to be set even if the big win is not achieved. Sometimes. If the unfavorable state continues for a long time, the player may lose motivation to play.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the normal mode, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a specific lottery result (small hit), the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is temporarily likely to be executed. It is configured so that it can be moved to With this configuration, if a big win is achieved by executing the lottery for the second special symbol while the chance mode A is set, it is possible (easily) to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 100%. Since the jackpot type (jackpot E, F) for which the opening/closing pattern of the specific winning port 65a is set is determined, the player's motivation for the game can be enhanced when the chance mode A is set. In addition, since the game can be played in the normal mode in anticipation that the chance mode A will be set as well as the big win, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG.14(b), the detail of the small hitting classification selection table 202e is demonstrated. This small hit type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to for determining the type of small hit when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit. In this small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 39" in association with "small hit A". This "small win A" is a small win type in which the chance mode A is set over 10 special symbol lotteries after the end of the small win. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, 40 random numbers become ``small winning A'', so when a special symbol lottery results in a small winning, it becomes ``small winning A''. The proportion is 40% (40/100).

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "40 to 79" in association with "small hit B". This "small win B" is a small win type in which the chance mode A is set over 20 special symbol lotteries after the end of the small win. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, 40 random numbers become ``small winning B'', so when a special symbol lottery results in a small winning, it becomes ``small winning B''. The proportion is 40% (40/100).

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with "small hit C". This "small win C" is a small win type in which the chance mode A is set over 100 special symbol lotteries after the end of the small win. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, there are 20 random numbers that become ``small winning C'', so when a special symbol lottery results in a small winning, it becomes ``small winning C''. The proportion is 20% (20/100).

Thus, in this embodiment, it is configured to shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode, with a small hit as a trigger. In the chance mode A, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the second special symbol is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol (the continuous mode is likely to be set when the jackpot is won). Since the lottery is easily executed, the player can play the game with a strong expectation of a big win. In addition, since the normal mode can be shifted to the chance mode A without going through the big win, the game can be inflated even if the big win has not been won for a long period of time. Therefore, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained by inserting the chance mode A. Furthermore, the length of the given chance mode A (the number of lotteries) is configured to differ for each small hit type. As a result, the player who sensed the small win can play the game expecting that the chance mode A is the small win type set for a longer period. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. As described above, the fluctuation pattern table 202d defines random values for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 15A, the variation pattern table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the normal mode, a continuous mode (probability variable state), and a chance mode B (time saving state), and a chance A table 202d3 for determining the variation pattern in chance mode A are included.

First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 15(b). FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 15(b), the normal table 202d1 includes a random number (variation type counter value CS1 counter value) is defined.

Specifically, when the first special symbol lottery is lost and complete loss is determined as the stop type, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is short in the range of "0 to 98" (7 seconds) variation. A pattern is associated, and a variation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "99 to 198". Also, when the special pattern lottery is lost and the stop reach is determined as the stop type, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the whole range) Normal reach various (30 seconds) are associated. Also, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if it becomes a small hit, which is a kind of outlier, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the whole range) Super reach various (60 seconds ) are associated.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with various normal reach (30 seconds) in the range of "0 to 50", and in the range of "51 to 179". Various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". That is, 60 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the first special symbols only in the case of a small win or a big win. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the chance mode A will be entered or that a big win will occur when the game develops into super ready-to-win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel secure during the fluctuation time after recognizing that the game has reversed to super ready-to-win. In addition, the special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds can be selected only in the case of a big hit, so when the variation time exceeds 60 seconds (developed into a special reach), the lottery result of the first special symbol this time will be It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot was won. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal mode, regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol, super long variation (600 seconds) is applied to all the values of the variation type counter CS1. are mapped. As a result, in the normal mode, when the game is played aiming at the second ball entrance 640 by striking to the right in order to execute the lottery for the advantageous second special symbol, once every 10 minutes (600 seconds) at the shortest. However, the lottery for the special symbol is not executed, and the game efficiency is extremely low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method in which the player always hits to the right in the normal mode. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, a simultaneous variation method (a method in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel) is adopted. Therefore, even if the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 without malicious intent in the normal mode due to an operation error of the player, etc., and the second special symbol is varied for 10 minutes, the left-handed By aiming at the first entrance 64, the variation of the first special symbol can be executed during the variation of the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(a), the details of the table 202d2 for consecutive resorts/chance B included in the variation pattern table 202d will be described. The table 202d2 for consecutive residences/chance B is, as described above, a table used for determining the variation pattern in the consecutive residences mode (probability variable state) and the chance mode B (time saving state).

In this consecutive house/chance B table 202d2, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same value of the variation type counter CS1, the same variation pattern (variation time) is obtained. is configured to determine Specifically, when the special symbol lottery is lost and complete loss is determined as the stop type, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190" Short loss (7 seconds) is associated. , "191 to 198" is associated with a long deviation (10 seconds). In this way, in Renso mode (variable probability state) and Chance mode B (time saving state), the special pattern lottery will be out, and if complete outage is determined as the stop type, the ratio of short outs than in normal mode is configured to be high. As a result, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the continuous mode and the chance mode B, which are more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode.

In addition, if the special symbol lottery is lost and the reach out is determined as the stop type, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the whole range) Normal reach various (30 seconds) are associated. Also, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if it becomes a small hit, which is a kind of outlier, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the whole range) Super reach various (60 seconds ) are associated.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with various normal reach (30 seconds) in the range of "0 to 50", and in the range of "51 to 179". Various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198".

In this way, unlike the normal mode, in the continuous mode (probability variable state) and the chance mode B (time saving state) in which the continuous house/chance B table 202d2 is set, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed The fluctuation time determined in 2 is equivalent to the lottery of the first special symbol. As a result, by hitting the ball aiming at the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed efficiently. That is, it becomes an advantageous state in which the variable probability state is likely to be given when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of a big win.

Next, the details of the chance A table 202d3 included in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 16(b). This chance A table 202d3 is a table used for determining the variation pattern in the chance mode A, as described above.

In this chance A table 202d3, the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display based on the first special symbol lottery and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same as in the normal table 202d1. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is determined to be 3 seconds regardless of the result of the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, since the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation display executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol, the game efficiency is better by hitting the ball to the right aiming at the second ball entrance 640 than hitting to the left. Become. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently execute the lottery for the second special symbol that is advantageous, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as described above, in the chance mode A, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, after the small win ends, a specific period (special symbol lottery ends 10 times, 20 times, or 100 times until) is set. Since the lottery for the first special symbol is likely to be executed in the normal mode, by shifting from the normal mode to the chance mode A through the small win, the player can be in an advantageous state without the big win. . Therefore, in the normal mode, even if the jackpot is not won for a long period of time (even if a so-called big addiction occurs), the player's motivation for the game can be maintained by inserting the chance mode A. can. Furthermore, as described above, the length of the given chance mode A (the number of lotteries) is different for each small hit type. As a result, the player who sensed the small win can play the game expecting that the chance mode A is the small win type set for a longer period. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the chance mode A, the variation pattern of 3 seconds is uniformly set regardless of the lottery result, but it is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. It may be determined arbitrarily within a range in which a right-handed player is more advantageous than a left-handed player. For example, when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, a uniform variation pattern of 3 seconds is set, and when the lottery for the first special symbol is won, the same variation pattern as when the lottery for the first special symbol is won is selected. may be configured.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second Special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, variable probability counter 203g, variable probability setting flag 203h, variable probability passage counter 203i, prize number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, Probability variation effective flag 203o, probability variation effective timer 203p, emission number counter 203q, time saving counter 203r, hit flag 203s, special figure 1 variation time counter 203t, special figure 2 variation time counter 203u, big hit medium flag 203v, small hit medium flag 203w , chance mode counter 203x, abnormality monitoring flag 203y, abnormality monitoring counter 203aa, and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved 4th area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Among the areas in which the data is stored, the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. In other words, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

If the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty, so it is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, a shift process is performed to shift the prize winning data stored in other reserve areas into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S1304 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 29).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 29, S1305 reference). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variable display of the variable display withheld by the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is affected by noise and the like, and the main control device Even if there is a deviation from the actual variable display of the number of held balls held in 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a special symbol (first symbol) variable display (third It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 . The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S1310 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S903 in FIG. 35). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (see S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding variable display in normal symbols M) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1505 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1503 in FIG. 41: No ).

The variable probability counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols). If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). In addition, as described above, in the definite variable state of the special design, it becomes the time saving state of the normal design. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that it is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and that it is the time-saving state of the normal symbol (continuous mode).

The variable probability counter 203g has an initial value of 0, and when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the big win, 101 is set at the end of the big win (see S2202 in FIG. 48). Also, in the game state update process (see FIG. 30) executed when starting the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol, the value is subtracted by one (see S402 of FIG. 30). ). Further, the value of the variable probability counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S707 in FIG. 33 and S1207 in FIG. 38).

This probability variation counter 203g is referred to for determining whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36). (See S502 in FIG. 31 and S1002 in FIG. 36). Specifically, when the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906) are executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the probability is high. Based on the first winning random number table 202a for time, while the special design lottery is performed, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special design is based on the first winning random number table 202a for low probability time. lottery will be held.

Further, the probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S1408, S1414 in FIG. 40). Specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203r are referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if any counter value is 1 or more, the second per random number for high probability time Based on the table 202c, while the normal design lottery is performed, if the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are both 0, the normal design is selected based on the second winning random number table 202c for low probability. A lottery will be held. In addition, in the normal symbol variation process, it is also referred to when determining the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of winning the normal symbol (see S1414 in FIG. 40).

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6(a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through this V prize switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2312 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S2206 in FIG. 48). The variable probability setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

It should be noted that, if the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the V winning switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. The flag 203h may be formally set to ON to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 has been passed before the power is turned off, depending on whether the value of the probability variable passage counter 203i, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by discriminating fraud such as rewriting only the probability variable setting flag 203h to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The probability variable passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the V prize switch 65e3 in one round (in this embodiment, one round of jackpot) during the jackpot game. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the ejection number counter 203q, which will be described later. This variable probability passage counter 203i is updated by being incremented by one when the V prize switch 65e3 is passed (S2311 in FIG. 49). Also, after executing the process of whether or not the number of winning game balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged game balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (S2411 in FIG. 50). It should be noted that this probability variable passing counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, it is updated by adding one (S2303 in FIG. 49). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the variable prize device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203j) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203q and the probability variable passage counter 203i) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S2411 in FIG. 50). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excited). In this embodiment, when one round of jackpot is started, the channel solenoid 65k is set to ON for 3 seconds (see FIG. 7). A counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the operation counter 203k at the time when one round of the jackpot is started. On the other hand, in the process of S2309 of the winning process (FIG. 49, S2113) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 has been set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is updated by being incremented by one (see S2405 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing plate 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. is a counter of

The remaining ball timer 203n is a game in which the variable prize winning device 65 wins when the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the variable prize winning device 65 is closed after one preset round (one round of jackpot in this embodiment) is completed. A counter for determining whether the time required for the ball to be ejected has elapsed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball to be discharged from the variable winning device 65 is 2 seconds. is set as Based on the upper limit value (three seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203n, it is determined whether the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match ( S2407 in FIG. 50). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加In addition, the ball is illegally left inside the variable prize winning device 65, and the ball flows down after the next round of the big win is started (that is, after it becomes possible to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2). It is possible to detect at an early stage a fraudulent act of passing the V winning prize switch 65e3.

In addition, when the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, even if the game ball passes through the V winning prize switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203h may not be set to on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

The variable probability valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the game ball passes through the V prize switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203o is set to ON, based on the fact that the channel solenoid 65k is ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) wins V This indicates that it is less than the time required to pass through the switch 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3.

The variable probability valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. After the passage solenoid 65k is turned off, the period required for normally passing the V winning switch 65e3 can be determined by the variable probability effective timer 203p. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the variable probability effective timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the V prize switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6(b)), the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass the game ball through the V winning switch 65e3. In addition, it is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the V prize switch 65e3 to pass it, or misdetecting the passage of the magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.

The ejection number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6(a)) in one round. This ejection number counter 203q is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of game balls winning the variable winning device 65 and the ejection number are determined (S2411 in FIG. 50).

The counter 203r during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. During this time saving counter 203r, 101 is set when the variable probability setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving counter 203r is decremented by one in the game state update process executed when starting the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, similarly to the variable probability counter 203g (FIG. 30 (see S404 of ). By configuring the time saving state to end at the start of the fluctuation, after the time saving state (chance mode B) is set after the big hit, at the time when the 101st fluctuation display is started, it is in the middle of the 100th fluctuation display. Even if the time saving state is terminated.

The winning flag 203s indicates that the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a big win or a small win at the start of variation based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. This is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined (see S507 in FIG. 31 and S1007 in FIG. 36). The win flag 203s is set to OFF when displaying a stop symbol corresponding to a big win or a small win (see S707 in FIG. 33 and S1207 in FIG. 38). A 2-bit storage area is assigned to the hit flag 203s, and information corresponding to the first special design is stored in the upper bits and information corresponding to the second special design is stored in the lower bits. More specifically, if the win flag 203s is "10H", it indicates that the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win or a small win, and that the variable display showing the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the winning flag 203s is "01H", it indicates that the lottery for the second special symbol has resulted in a big win, and that the variable display showing the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the winning flag 203s is "00H", it indicates that neither the big winning variation nor the small winning variation is executed.

The winning flag 203s, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is first set to ON at the start of fluctuation, even if the other lottery result is a big win or a small win. , the win flag 203s is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same way as a loss. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the first special symbol and the second special symbol from being simultaneously displayed to trigger the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. In other words, when one of the special symbols starts a big win variation display, the other does not start a big win or small win variation display, and only the deviation variation mode is displayed. be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the common winning flag 203s is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed as a big hit or a small hit by the variable display. By adopting such a configuration, even if the variation display of the jackpot D is started with the first special symbol during the variable probability state, the variation time is set long, and the variation time is short with the second special symbol. By making the lottery easier, it is possible to make the second special symbol easy to win big until the big win D starts. Therefore, an effect is executed to notify the player of the time until the start of the jackpot D (that is, the period until the variable probability game state is completed), and the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect to make a game to be played. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh presentation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S609 in FIG. 32). After that, in the processing of S701 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed variation time (in this embodiment, 1 each) is decremented and updated.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S1109 in FIG. 37). After that, in the processing of S1201 of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 38, S207), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed variation time (in this embodiment, one by one) is subtracted and updated.

The jackpot middle flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is in progress. When this jackpot middle flag 203v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and when it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not in progress. The mid-jackpot flag 203v is set to ON at the start of the jackpot during the jackpot control process (see S2004 in FIG. 47) (see S2104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2206 in FIG. 48).

The flag 203w during a small hit is a flag which shows whether it is during a small hit. If this small winning medium flag 203w is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a small winning, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in the small winning. This small hit medium flag 203w is set to ON at the start of the small hit in the small hit control process (see S2005 in FIG. 51) (see S2503 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S2510 in FIG. 51).

The chance mode counter 203x is a counter that indicates whether or not the chance mode A is currently on. If the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 1 or more, it means that the current chance mode is A. Therefore, when selecting a variation pattern, the above-described chance A table 202d3 is referred to determine the variation pattern. be done. On the other hand, if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0, it means that the current state is other than chance mode A (normal mode, consecutive mode, or chance mode B). (Normal table 202d1 or Renso/chance B table 202d2) is read from the fluctuation pattern table 202d and used to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time). This chance mode counter 203x is set to a value corresponding to the small hit type when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit (see S803, S805 and S806 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the special symbols, the value is subtracted by one (see S406 in FIG. 30).

The abnormality monitoring flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing in a correct game method (a game method advantageous to the player) corresponding to the current game state. If this abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on, it indicates that the player may be playing a game using an illegal (disadvantageous) game method. indicates that you are doing

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the continuous mode (variable probability state), the chance mode A, and the chance mode B, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened (see FIGS. 16(a) and (b)), The lottery for the second special symbol is facilitated to be executed. Therefore, since it is more advantageous for the player to play the game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, the correct game method is to hit to the right. In this case, the lottery is usually executed with the second special symbol, and the player plays the game with an illegal (disadvantageous) game method during the period when the game is executed with the first special symbol. Therefore, the abnormality monitor flag 203y is set to ON. When the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON, the period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is continuously set to ON is counted by an abnormality monitoring counter 203aa, which will be described later, for a predetermined time (20 seconds in this embodiment). When it becomes the above, abnormality notification (audio and warning image display) is executed.

In addition, in the normal mode (the normal state in which the chance mode A is not set), the correct game method is to play the game with the left hand, but the second ball entrance 640, which is supposed to enter the ball only with the right hand, and the normal When it is determined that the ball enters the ball entrance 67 and the variation display of the second special symbol or the variation display of the normal symbol is executed, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON, and abnormality notification is executed. is configured as

The abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is a counter for measuring (counting) a period during which there is a high possibility that a game is being played using an illegal game method. When the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa reaches the count value corresponding to 20 seconds, abnormality notification is executed. The value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is updated by 1 when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is turned on during the fraud monitoring process (see S1702 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off, it is reset to 0 (see S1705 in FIG. 43).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Next, the details of mode transition performed by using various tables provided in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. Four types of modes are provided in the first embodiment. Specifically, the "normal mode" and "chance mode A" set in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, and normal state of normal symbols), and the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, In addition, "Continuous mode" set as a time-saving state of normal patterns) and "Chance mode B" set as a time-saving state (low-probability state of special patterns and time-saving state of normal patterns) are provided. ing.

The "normal mode" shown on the upper left side of FIG. 18 is the most disadvantageous state for the player because it is difficult to execute the lottery for the second special symbol. Since it is difficult to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, it is more advantageous for the player to execute the lottery for the first special symbol by hitting the ball aiming at the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁As shown in the upper left of FIG. 18, in the "normal mode", there is a possibility of shifting to another mode due to a small win or a big win in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the big win types are the big wins A and B, the game shifts to the "Renso mode". If the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 because the ball was not launched in the first round of the big win, the "Renso mode" will not be set even if the big wins A and B are made. None (chance mode B is set).

In addition, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the big win type is a big win C, the game shifts to a "chance mode B". In the first round of the jackpot, if the ball enters the specific winning port 65a during an extremely short opening period of the opening/closing plate 65f1 and the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, even in the case of the jackpot C. , "Renso mode" is set (chance mode B is not set). Furthermore, when the lottery of special symbols results in a small win, the game shifts to "chance mode A" after the small win is completed. The number of lotteries in which this "chance mode A" continues differs according to the small hit type (see FIG. 14(b)).

"Chance mode A" shown on the upper right side of FIG. Since the variation pattern table (chance A table 202d3) with a short variation display variation time (3 seconds) is referred to, this mode facilitates the lottery of the second special symbols compared to the "normal mode". As described above, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big hit, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is a pattern (opening/closing pattern with a long opening time) in which there is a high possibility that the ball will pass through the V winning switch 65e3. Since it is always set, it is more advantageous for the player than winning a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the state more advantageous than the "normal mode" while maintaining the same game state.

In this "chance mode A", there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a big hit is achieved or when a specified number of special symbol lotteries are executed after the chance mode A is entered. Specifically, when a special pattern lottery results in a big win and either of the big wins E or F is achieved, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is such that the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 (see the lower part of FIG. 7). is set, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot mode is set to the "ream mode". It should be noted that even if the jackpot E or F, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it will not shift to the "Renso mode" (only the time-saving state of the normal pattern is given As a result, it shifts to chance mode B). In addition, in the "chance mode A", when the lottery of the special symbols for the specified number of times (10 times, 20 times or 100 times) is completed without a big hit, the game returns to the "normal mode".

In this way, when the game state is the normal state, two types of modes, ie, the disadvantageous "normal mode" and the more advantageous "chance mode A" than the "normal mode", can be switched between. . By configuring in this way, even in a normal state that is more disadvantageous than the "Renso mode" or the "Chance mode B", the degree of advantage can be switched according to the progress of the game. Therefore, even if a big win is not achieved, the game can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming monotonous, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

"Chance mode B" shown in the middle stage of FIG. 18 is a mode which shows a time saving state as above-mentioned. In the time-saving state, as described above, the lottery for the second special symbol is more likely to be executed.

In this "chance mode B", there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a jackpot is achieved or when a lottery of special symbols is executed a specified number of times (100 times) after the chance mode B is set. be. Specifically, when a special pattern lottery results in a big win and either of the big wins E or F is achieved, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is such that the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 (see the lower part of FIG. 7). is set, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot mode is set to the "ream mode". It should be noted that even if the jackpot E or F, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it will not shift to the "Renso mode" (only the time-saving state of the normal pattern is given As a result, chance mode B is looped). In addition, in the "chance mode B", when the lottery of the special symbols for the specified number of times (100 times) is completed without a big hit, the game shifts to the "normal mode".

The “Renso mode” shown in the lower part of FIG. 18 is a mode that indicates a variable probability state, as described above. In the variable probability state, as described above, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed, and the special symbol lottery has a higher probability of winning (1/300→1/75), which is extremely advantageous for the player. becomes.

In this "Continuous Mode", when the lottery for special symbols is executed a specified number of times (100 times) after the "Continuous Mode" is entered, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode. Specifically, when the lottery for the special symbol is lost 100 times in a row in the "Rental Mode", the game shifts (falls) to the "Normal Mode". On the other hand, it basically does not shift to another mode with a big hit (loops "Renso mode"). Therefore, when the "Renso mode" is set, the probability of winning a big win in the lottery of the special symbols becomes high, and when the big win is made, the "Renso mode" is set as the game state after the big win. , a very advantageous mode in which the jackpot and the "Renso mode" are easily repeated. Therefore, the player can play the game with the goal of switching to the "Renso mode", so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. It should be noted that even if the lottery of special symbols results in a big win E or F, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big win, the "continuous mode" will not be looped, and the chance mode B will be skipped. and migrate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are configured to move back and forth. In addition, it is possible not only to move between different game states, but also to move between modes with different degrees of advantage in the same game state. That is, in the most disadvantageous normal state, the degree of advantage can be varied according to the game situation. Therefore, even if the lottery of special symbols continues to be lost for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous due to the change in the degree of advantage.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and an opening/closing plate 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable display effects ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 19(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 19(b). FIG. 19(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2, Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2, secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e, secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f, effect counter 223g, and game state storage area 223h and at least another memory area 223z.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 54) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are variable effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 corresponds to the reserved ball number of the variable performance based on the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 corresponds to the variable performance based on the first special symbol lottery. corresponds to the number of balls held in

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the second special symbol reserved ball number The value of the counter 203e cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2. , the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls in the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. A number of balls command is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (see S4211 in FIG. 54). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. , while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the value can be updated.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223 b 1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223 b 2 are used for the display of the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the audio lamp control device 113, the second special symbol The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball patterns corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b2 is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Its value is changed while synchronizing with Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. can be changed while synchronizing with Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 and special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 are when receiving the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main control device 110 respectively It is turned on (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 54), and turned off when the variable display is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S4402 and S4407 in FIG. 55). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 are turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are turned on (see S4202 in FIG. 54), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4412 in FIG. 55). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 is turned on, the stop type is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

The secondary special figure 1 variation time counter 223e and secondary special figure 2 variation time counter 223f are counters for counting the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol, respectively.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed. .

The game state storage area 223h is a storage area in which information corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. The game state storage area 223h is updated with information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command each time a state command output from the main controller 110 is received (S4011 in FIG. 52, See S4215 in FIG. 54). More specifically, the gaming state storage area 223h is allocated with a 3-bit storage area, and whether or not it is a probability variable state of special symbols and whether or not it is a time saving state of normal symbols in order from the upper bit. , a value indicating whether or not the chance mode A is stored. For example, if the value of the game state storage area 223h is "110H", it means that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, the continuous mode), and if it is "010H" , It means that it is a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols (that is, chance mode B). On the other hand, if the information stored in the game state storage area 223h is "000H", it means the normal mode.

By updating the game state storage area 223h according to the state command output from the main controller 110, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description continues. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 20, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND-type flash memory 234a generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 57) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 26) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 59(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND-type flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 57).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 21 . FIG. 21 shows the power on display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 21(c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, there is a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. 21(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. 21(b) and 21(c), the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b is used to draw the power-on variation image, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 22A and 22B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 22(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage," "river stage," and "empty stage," respectively, with respect to back face A corresponding to "town stage." . Also, FIG. 23 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 22, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the change of the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 selects the corresponding back surface image. First, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between the position a and the position a', and the image of the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, the rear image on the rear surface E shows the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 23(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 23(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 23(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the back image shown in FIG. 23(a) is displayed again, and the back images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 22(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Further, the back side E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 23(a), and the image data corresponding to the back side images between FIGS. is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 23(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back faces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and scroll display or color tone change with the passage of time. It can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear face E, the images shown in FIGS. 23(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 23(b)-(c) and FIGS. to (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. Since the data can be transferred to the video RAM 236, after displaying the images of FIGS. 23(b) to (c) and FIGS. 23(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 for the rear surfaces B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-surface images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 6) with numerals "0" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the back face type, when specifying to display a back face image different from back faces A to E, information specifying which back face image is to be displayed is also described.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 24) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Such a configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 25). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 25).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 57). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting processing of the transfer setting processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, , is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 68(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 59B). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59B) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 59(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 60 to 64) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 65 to 67) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 68A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 68(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 26) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 59(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 65) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 26), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed (FIG. 59(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 65). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 69). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 69). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 70).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 59B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 64(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 69), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 69). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 64(a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 65) (see S7221 in FIG. 65). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set (S6505 in FIG. 61(a), S6705 in FIG. 62(a), S6805 in FIG. 62(b) , S6905 in FIG. 63). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 65) (S7214 in FIG. 65). It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 61(a), S6705 in FIG. 62(a), S6805 in FIG. 62(b), FIG. 63, S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 51. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing (see FIG. 45) that is started when the power is turned on, main processing (see FIG. 46) that is executed after the start-up processing, and periodic processing (see FIG. 46). There are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) that is activated at a cycle of 2 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) that is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. First, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained, and then the startup processing (see FIG. 45) and the main processing (see FIG. 46) will be explained.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) and the main process (see FIG. 46), based on various processes, generate a command or the like to be sent to the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113, etc., provided in the RAM203 temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the pending ball number command set in the starting winning process (FIG. 39, S108). Also, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened or closed. A large-opening opening/closing process for opening the door is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round of big hits (special game state), and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 . Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4, and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (this embodiment 299, 99, 239, 99) are cleared to 0 respectively. Further, when the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the first winning random number counter. It is read as the initial value of C1 or the second winning random number counter C4, and the initial value is set in the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203 .

Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed. (S107), and then, a starting winning process associated with winning the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, and the details of the starting winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the starting winning process (S108), the normal symbol variation process, which is normal symbol variation processing for the passing of the game ball through the normal ball entrance 67, is executed (S109), and then the normal ball entrance 67. Through gate passage processing is executed for the passage of the game ball (S110). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, and details of the through gate passage process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the through-gate passing process (S110), a variation monitoring process (S111) is executed to monitor whether the player is playing a correct game corresponding to the game state, and then the player does not correspond to the game state. When a (illegal) game is being played, a fraudulent monitoring process (S112) is performed to monitor the period. Details of the fluctuation monitoring process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, and details of the fraud monitoring process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the fraud monitoring process (S112) is executed, the ball launch control process is executed (S113), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S114). End timer interrupt processing. In the shooting control process (S113), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. When the ball shooting is on, the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, special symbol variation processing (S107), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), various judgments and decisions are made using the respective counter values acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, In a variable display mode according to the determination result, control is performed to simultaneously enable variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, or to stop display in a display mode showing the determination result. be done.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit game is being executed (S201), and when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit game is being executed (S201: Yes), since the start and stop of the variable display of the special symbol should not be set, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that neither the big win nor the small win is being made (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed (S202). In the process of S202, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204), and the process proceeds to S205. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), when the specified variation time has elapsed during the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol lottery A process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the result is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203), and the process proceeds to S205. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, but in the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S203), the reserved data (various counter values) are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a. If so, big hit determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the reserved data is executed.

In the processing of S205 executed after the first special symbol variation start processing (S203) or the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204) is performed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. (S205). In the processing of S205, when it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing is executed (S207), and this processing ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, but in the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 38, S207), as in the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204), the second special symbol When the specified fluctuation time has passed during the fluctuation display of , the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S205, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206), and this process is finished. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, but in the second special symbol variation start process (S206), as in the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S203), the number of second special symbol reserved balls is stored. If the reserved data (various counter values) are stored in the area 203b, the big hit determination and variation pattern selection processing are executed based on the reserved data.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (S303), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b1. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b1 is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

After the process of S304 is finished, next, a game state update process is executed (S304). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but in the game state update process (FIG. 30, S304), various counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 (probability variation counter 203g, time saving medium counter 203r, chance mode counter 203x) This is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the value.

When the process of S305 is completed, next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 31, but in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306), the first per random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c and the current gaming state, whether or not it is a big hit is determined.

When the process of S306 is finished, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307), and this process is finished. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, but in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S307), the first per random number counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c A process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value is executed based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of C1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the game state update process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this game state update process (S305).

When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 30) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S401), and if it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 ( S401: Yes), subtract 1 from the value of the variable probability counter (S402), and proceed to the process of S403. On the other hand, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 0 (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

In the process of S403, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203r during time saving is greater than 0 (S403). In the process of S403, when it is determined that the counter 203r is greater than 0 during time saving (S403: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203r during time saving (S404), and the process proceeds to S405. On the other hand, when the value of the counter 203r during time saving is 0 (S403: No), the process of S404 is skipped and it transfers to the process of S405.

In the processing of S405, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S405). is subtracted by 1 (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S405 that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S405: No), the process of S406 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S407.

In the processing of S407, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been changed. More specifically, the value of the variable probability counter 203g is updated from 1 to 0, and the variable probability state is changed to the normal state, or the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is updated from 1 to 0, and the time saving state is changed from the normal state. , or the value of the chance mode counter 203x is updated from 1 to 0 to determine whether the chance mode A is changed to the normal mode in the normal state. In the processing of S407, when it is determined that the game state has been changed (S407: Yes), a state command indicating the changed game state is set (S408), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state has not been changed (S407: No), the process of S408 is skipped and the process ends.

The status command set in the process of S408 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . With this state command, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S501). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is a high probability state (probability variable state) (S502). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 1 or more (that is, the game state is the variable probability state) (S502: Yes), the first per random number table 202a for high probability and the jackpot It is determined whether or not the random value obtained from the counter buffer matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S503). On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S502: No), the first per random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the specified random value for the big win matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S504).

When the processing of S503 or S504 ends, then it is determined whether or not the hit flag 203s is ON (S505), and if it is determined that it is ON (S505: Yes), this first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 31) is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol is judged to be a big hit or a small hit, and it means that the variable display showing the judgment result is being executed, so the first As the type of the stop symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device 37, the missing symbol of the first special symbol is set (S510), and the process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the fact that both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol result in a big win, and that one big win is started while the other big win is being executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, if it is determined that the hit flag 203s is not on (is off) (S505: No), then the lottery result (determination result) of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. (S506), and if it is determined to be either a big win or a small win (S506: Yes), the winning flag 203s is set to ON (S507). Next, the lottery result of the first special design is set to a big hit or a small hit (S508), the winning (big hit or small hit) design of the first special design is set in the first design display device 37 (S509), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S506, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (the lottery result is lost) (S506: No), the process is shifted to S510 and stopped. The missing symbol of the first special symbol is set as the symbol (S510), and the process is terminated.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, in the case of misalignment, the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first pattern display device 37 is set to "-" indicating misalignment. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting symbols to be stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) is a jackpot. (S601), when it is determined to be a jackpot (S601: Yes), the first winning type selection table 202b is read, and the first special symbol jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is selected. (S602). After the process of S602 is completed, the process proceeds to S603.

On the other hand, in the processing of S601, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (small hit or a loss) (S601: No), the processing of S602 is skipped and the processing of S603 is performed. do.

In the process of S603, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S603). If it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S603: Yes), it means that the lottery for the first special symbol has been executed in the chance mode A, so the chance A table 202d3 is used as the variation pattern table. is read out (S604), and the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S603: No), next, it is determined whether both the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are 0 (S605).

In the process of S605, if it is determined that both the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203r are 0 (S605: Yes), it means that the current state is the normal mode, so the variation The normal table 202d1 is read out as the pattern table, and the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, if it is determined that either the value of the probability variable counter 203g or the value of the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more (S605: No), it means that the probability variable state or the time saving state is in progress Therefore, the consecutive house/chance B table 202d2 is read out as the fluctuation pattern table (S607), and the process proceeds to S608.

In the process of S608, one variation pattern (variation time) is selected from the read variation pattern table based on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S608). Then, based on the selected variation pattern, along with generating a special figure 1 variation pattern command, set the value corresponding to the variation pattern selected this time to the special figure 1 variation time counter (S609). Next, the special figure 1 stop classification command is set (S610), and this processing ends.

The special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the special figure 1 variation pattern command, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the detailed variation display effect mode based on the variation pattern notified by the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204).

In the special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204), first, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203t is subtracted and updated (S701), and the counter value after subtraction is the variation time in the variation pattern set this time. It is determined whether or not the counter value corresponds to the end (S702). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is not the counter value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S702: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S702, if the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203t is determined to be the counter value corresponding to the end of the variable time (S702: Yes), then the current variation pattern is the It is determined whether or not a big win is set as a result of the lottery for one special symbol (S703). In the processing of S703, if it is determined that the jackpot is set (S703: Yes), set the special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol (S704), and display the first symbol A change stop of the second special symbol of the device 37 is set (S705). Then, the start of the jackpot is set (S706), the values of the winning flag 203s, probability variation counter 203g, time saving medium counter 203r, and chance mode counter 203x are reset (S707), and the process proceeds to S709.

On the other hand, in the process of S703, when it is determined that a lottery result other than the big hit (loss or small hit) is set as the lottery result of the first special symbol (S703: No), the process shifts to the chance mode A. It is determined whether or not, and if the chance mode is to be shifted to chance mode A, chance mode setting processing for setting the number of times of the chance mode is performed (S708), and the processing shifts to S709. Details of the chance mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the symbol indicating the big hit is set (S709), and the variation of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S710 ), the process ends.

By constructing in this way, the second special symbol can be stopped at the symbol corresponding to the loss in accordance with the timing when the first special symbol is stop-displayed at the symbol corresponding to the win. Therefore, the player can be made to concentrate on the big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the chance mode setting process (S708), which is one process of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this chance mode setting process (S708).

When this chance mode setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is set as the lottery result of the first special symbol (S801), and it is not a small hit (that is, it is lost). If so (S801: No), chance mode A will not be set, so this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S801: Yes), it is determined whether the small hit type is a small hit A (S802). .

In the process of S802, when it is determined that it is a small hit A (S802: Yes), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 10 (S803), and the process proceeds to S807. As a result, the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode (the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed), can be set over 10 special symbol lotteries after the end of the small win.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit type this time is not a small hit A (S802: No), then it is determined whether the small hit type is a small hit B (S804), and if it is a small hit B (S804: Yes), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 20 (S805), and the process proceeds to S807. On the other hand, in the processing of S804, when it is determined that the small hit type of this time is not the small hit B (that is, the small hit C) (S804: No), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 100 (S806 ), the process proceeds to S807.

In the process of S807, set the state command indicating the transition to the chance mode A (S807), then set the display special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol in the symbol corresponding to the deviation ( S808). Next, the variable display of the second special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S809), the start of the small hit is set (S810), the hit flag 203s is set off (S811), and this processing exit.

By this chance mode setting process (see FIG. 34), when a small hit is achieved, the chance mode A can be set for the number of times corresponding to the small hit type. Thus, when the game state is the normal state, every time a small win is made, the most disadvantageous normal mode for the player is changed to the comparatively advantageous chance mode (when the player hits to the right, the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed). You can move to A. Therefore, even if the game does not become a big win, it is possible to add excitement to the game in the normal state, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), first, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S901), and the value of the acquired second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is It is determined whether or not the value (N2) is greater than 0 (S902). In the process of S902, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S902: No), there is no reserved ball and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, the processing of S903 to S906 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S907. On the other hand, in the process of S902, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S902: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (S903), and a pending ball number command is set for notifying the value after the subtraction to the audio lamp control device 113 (S904).

Next, the game state update process described above with reference to FIG. 30 is executed (S905), the second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S906), and the process proceeds to S907. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906) is performed by the first hit stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether or not it is a big win based on the value of the random number counter C1.

In the process of S907, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S907), and the process ends. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 37, S907) is performed by the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern from the variation pattern table 202d according to the value of CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 35, S206), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S906).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36), first, various counter values stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are acquired (S1001). Next, referring to the value of the variable probability counter 203g, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state (S1002). In the process of S1002, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 1 or more (that is, the game state is a variable probability state) (S1002: Yes), the first per random number table 202a for high probability (Fig. 13(b)) and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match (S1003), and the process proceeds to S1005.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 0 (that is, the game state is normal) (S1002: No), the first per random number table 202a for low probability ( 13(b)) and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 are obtained (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005.

In the process of S1005, it is determined whether or not the winning flag 203s is ON (S1005), and if it is determined that the winning flag 203s is OFF, that is, the big winning variation display is executed in the first special symbol. If it is determined that there is no (S1005: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S1003 or S1004 is a big win (S1006). In the processing of S1006, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S1006: Yes), the winning flag 203s is set to ON (S1007), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a big hit (S1008). . Next, the jackpot design of the second special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S1009), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, if it is determined that the winning flag 203s is ON (S1005: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S1006 that the set lottery result is out ( S1006: No), a symbol indicating the deviation of the second special symbol is set in the first special symbol display device 37 (S1010), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S907), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S907).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1101). In the process of S1101, when it is determined that the big hit is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1101: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202b is read, and the counter of the first hit type counter C2 A winning type corresponding to the value is selected (S1102). After that, the process proceeds to S1103. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the second special symbol lottery result is set to be out (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1103.

In the processing of S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S1103). The table 202d3 is read (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1108. On the other hand, if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S1103: No), it is determined whether the values of both the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are 0 (S1105). In the process of S1105, if both the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving counter 203r are 0 (S1105: Yes), the normal table 202d1 is read as a variation pattern table (S1106), and the process proceeds to S1108 .

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if one of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r has a value of 1 or more (S1105: No), read out the table 202d2 for consecutive house/chance B as a variation pattern table. (S1107), the process proceeds to S1108.

In the process of S1108, a variation pattern corresponding to the set special symbol lottery result and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (S1108). Then, based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S1108, along with generating (setting) the special figure 2 variation pattern command, set the counter value corresponding to the selected variation pattern to the special figure 2 variation time counter 203u ( S1109), set the special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1110), and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is subtracted and updated (S1201), and the counter value after the subtraction is the counter corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time. It is determined whether or not it is a value (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the counter value does not correspond to the end of the fluctuation time (S1202: No), this process is terminated as it is without setting the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is a value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S1202: Yes), a big hit is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol. (S1203). When it is determined that the jackpot is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1203: Yes), the voice lamp control device to stop display the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the set stop type Set special figure 1 decision command for notifying 113 (S1204). Next, the stop display of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S1205). Then, the start of the jackpot is set (S1206), each value of the winning flag 203s, the probability variation counter 203g, the time saving medium counter 203r, and the chance mode counter 203x is reset (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if it is determined that the second special symbol lottery result is set as a small hit or out (S1203: No), skip the processes of S1204 to S1207 and proceed to the process of S1208. Transition.

In the process of S1208, the variation of the second special symbol, to set the special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 so as to stop display in the set stop type (S1208), the first symbol The change stop of the second special symbol being executed in the display device 37 is set (S1219), and this process is terminated.

Thus, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously variably displayed. can be made Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, when the jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other symbol is displayed. Since the variable display of the special symbols is removed and the symbols are stopped and displayed, the player can play the game while concentrating on the big winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the starting winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S108). In the starting winning process (FIG. 39), it is determined whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (whether the ball has entered the starting prize). Up to 4 each for the ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640), each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is a process to

In the starting winning process (see FIG. 39), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S1301). Here, winning to the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (there has been a starting prize) (S1301: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired ( S1302), it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1303). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64 is stored up to the upper limit.

Then, whether there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S1301: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is not less than 4 (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1307 without acquiring various counter values in the counter buffer. On the other hand, there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64 (S1301: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the first special figure reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S1303: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1304), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls after the addition is set (S1305). .

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b1.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S1305, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is It is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. In the process of S1306, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

It should be noted that the processing of S1307 to S1312 is similar to the processing performed for the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 executed in each of the processing of S1301 to S1306. Since it is executed for the start winning to the mouth 640, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the normal symbol variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 40), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S1401). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is being performed. up to is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1401: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1401: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner. (S1402). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being changed and displayed (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed ( S1420). It should be noted that the variable time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1419, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit 88. FIG.

In the process of S1420, if the variable time has not elapsed (S1420: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1420, when it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbols that are displayed in a variable manner has passed (S1420: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1421). . In the process of S1421, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1413, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "○" symbol as the second symbol (lighting display ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of loss is set by the processing of S1418, the second symbol display device 83 displays the "x" symbol as the second symbol, and the stop display (lights up). displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S1421, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the process of S1413 and the process of S1418. The 2-symbol display device 83 is stopped (lighted up).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1422). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S1422: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 640a is set (1423). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a loss (S1422: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1402, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S1402: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1403).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1404), and when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S1404: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1404: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1405).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1406). In the process of S1406, the data stored in the normal design reservation first to fourth areas of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, normal design reservation 1st area → execution area, normal design reservation 2nd area → normal design reservation 1st area, normal design reservation 3rd area → normal design reservation 2nd area, normal design reservation 4th area → Shift the data in each area such as the third area for normal design reservation. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S1407).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the time saving state (including the variable probability state) (S1408). More specifically, when the value of any one of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state (or probability variation state). In the process of S1408, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (S1408: No), based on the hit determination value of the normal per symbol random number table for low probability (see FIG. 14 (a)), the success or failure determination A result is acquired (S1411). On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the time saving game is in progress (S1408: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1409). In the process of S1409, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1409: Yes), the process of S1411 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1409: No), the hit determination value of the normal symbol per random number table for high probability (see FIG. 14 (a)) Based on this, the result of the suitability determination is acquired (S1410).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second pattern (normal pattern) is hit (S1412), and when it is determined that the lottery result of the second pattern (normal pattern) is not hit (that is, it is lost). (S1412: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode when out, is set (S1418), and the process proceeds to S1419. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is winning (that is, winning) (S1412: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is "○". is set (S1413).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is the time saving state (including the variable probability state) (S1414), and when it is determined that the time saving game is in progress (S1414: Yes), the process proceeds to S1416. On the other hand, in the process of S1414, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (S1414: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1415). In the process of S1415, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1415: Yes), the process proceeds to S1416.

In the process of S1416, the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second for the open period and 2 times to be opened (S1416), and the process proceeds to S1419. On the other hand, in the process of S1415, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (that is, the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S1415: No), the electric accessory 640a is opened. The time is set to 0.9 seconds and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1417), and the process proceeds to S1419.

In the process of S1419 which is executed after executing any one of the processes of S1416 to S1418, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 seconds (S1419), and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S110) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through gate passage processing (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 for every two.

In the through gate passing process (see FIG. 41), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1501). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S1501: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1502), and the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value (M) of 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1503).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (M) is not less than 4 (S1503: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 (S1501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203f (S1504). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free reservation areas (normal design reservation first to fourth areas) of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1505). In addition, in the process of S1505, the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the normal design reserved 1 area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal design reservation 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal design reservation 3 area, and if the value is 3, the normal design reservation 4 area is first. area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the fluctuation monitoring process (S111), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the contents of this fluctuation monitoring process (S111). In this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), a process of monitoring whether the player is playing a game correctly corresponding to the game state is executed. In this embodiment, in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), basically, the ball is shot with a firing intensity that allows the ball to pass through the path on the left side of the variable display unit 80. The game method (left-handed hitting) becomes the regular game method, and the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that allows the ball to pass through the path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 during the big win, the small win, the time-saving state, and the variable probability state. The game method (right-handed) is the regular game method. In addition, in the normal state, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the super-long variation (600 seconds) is set as the variation pattern, so the game efficiency deteriorates. Therefore, hitting to the right in the normal state is a disadvantageous way for the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player by monitoring whether the player is playing with the correct stroke. In addition, it is possible to monitor the act of conducting a lottery for the second special symbol that is advantageous by illegally hitting the ball to the right and entering the second ball entrance 640, and it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hole due to the illegality. You can reduce the possibility of it being lost. Even in the normal state, if the chance mode A is set over the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times) after the small hit, hitting to the right is a regular game. method.

In the fluctuation monitoring process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is in progress (S1601). In the process of S1601, if it is determined that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (S1601: No), whether it is in the probability variable state or the time saving state (that is, the value of either the probability changing counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more) is determined (S1602), and if it is determined that it is in the variable probability state or in the time saving state (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol is in the variable display (S1603) . When it is determined that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S1603: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON (S1604), and this process is terminated. Here, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game with the correct game method (left-handed or right-handed) corresponding to the gaming state. When the time period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON becomes longer than a predetermined period (for example, 120 seconds or longer), an abnormality notification command is set, and an abnormality notification (third symbol A character indicating an abnormality (for example, a character indicating a correct game method (please hit right, etc.) is displayed on the display device 81, and an error sound or an instruction sound for a correct game is output by voice. An abnormal signal is output to the computer)) is executed.

In the probability variable state and the time saving state, by playing the game in the correct game method (playing right), the advantageous second special symbol lottery is easily executed, and the disadvantageous first special symbol lottery is executed. it gets harder. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, there is a high possibility that the player is playing the game with a disadvantageous left hand. In this case, by continuing the variable display of the first special symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 120 seconds), an abnormality is notified, thereby continuing the game with an illegal game method that is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from being lost.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when it is determined that it is during the big hit or during the small hit (S1601: Yes), or in the process of S1603, when it is determined that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation stop ( S1603: No), the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to OFF (S1605).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1602 that it is neither the probability variable state nor the time saving state (S1602: No), it means that the current gaming state is the normal state, so next, the value of the chance mode counter 203x It is determined whether or not it is greater than 0 (that is, whether or not it is a chance mode A in which hitting to the right is the regular game method) (S1606). In the process of S1606, if it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S1606: Yes), each process of S1603 to S1605 is executed in the same manner as during the variable probability state or during the time saving state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1606, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (normal mode) (S1606: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner. (S1607). In the process of S1607, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not fluctuating (S1607: No), then it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuating (S1608), and the second special symbol is fluctuating. If not (S1608: No), since there is a high possibility that the player is playing the game in the regular mode (left-handed), the abnormality monitor flag 203y is set to off (S1609), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1607, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the process of changing (S1607: Yes), or in the process of S1608, when it is determined that the second special symbol is in the process of varying (S1608: Yes), meaning that the ball passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 or entered the second ball entrance 640 during the normal mode, and there is a high possibility that the player is hitting right. . Therefore, in this case, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON (S1604), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the normal mode, playing the game with the left hand is the regular game method, but if the normal symbols and the second special symbols that can be variably displayed in the case of the right hand are fluctuating, it is erroneous. The possibility of playing a game with the game method is increased. Therefore, by setting the abnormality monitoring flag 203y to ON, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is kept ON for a predetermined period of time (120 seconds in this embodiment) or longer, an abnormality notification is executed. A game method can be discovered earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the unforeseen disadvantage given to the hole due to the illegal game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the fraud monitoring process (S112), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this fraud monitoring process (S112). In this fraud monitoring process (see FIG. 43), the period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON is counted, and an abnormality alarm command is set when a predetermined period of time or more (120 seconds or more in this embodiment) is reached. Processing is performed.

In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 43, S112), first, it is determined whether or not the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on (S1701). 1 is added and updated (S1702). Then, it is determined whether the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa after updating is equal to or greater than the upper limit (counter value corresponding to 120 seconds in this embodiment) (S1703), and if it is determined that it is less than the upper limit (S1703: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is greater than or equal to the upper limit (S1703: Yes), an abnormality warning command is set (S1704), and this process ends.

This abnormality alarm command is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this abnormality warning command, the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output device 226 are caused to output the abnormal warning mode. This makes it possible to detect fraud and defects at an early stage.

Further, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON and continues to be set to ON for a predetermined period (120 seconds in this embodiment), an abnormality warning command is set. Even if there is a short period of time (less than 120 seconds) when the game state is switched, even if there is a period in which the regular game method is not played (for example, a period of switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state), Since the abnormality warning is not output, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player feels uncomfortable.

In this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 120 seconds, but it is not limited to this, and the predetermined period is configured to be longer than the switching time necessary for normal game play when switching between game states. do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the problem that an abnormal alarm is erroneously output while the player is changing the firing intensity (the direction in which the ball is shot).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1701, if it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off (S1701: No), the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1705), and this processing ends. do.

In this way, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off, the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is reset to the initial value, so that the process of setting the abnormality alarm command is avoided. To suppress the problem that an abnormality alarm is output while a game is being played.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S1801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 45), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1904), and if it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905). (S1905: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1910.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1911, S1912).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 3) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1911, S1912).

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1911, S1912) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1913.

On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is If it is normal (S1907: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, and the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1908). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the gaming state at the time of drive power interruption (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1913. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, to the sound lamp control device 113, output a production permission command for permitting execution of various productions (S1913), a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the game state at the time of startup is set (S1914). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1915), and the main process (see FIG. 46), which will be described later, is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 46), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 .

When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003). After the processing of S2003, a jackpot control process for setting the operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 and the flow path solenoid 65k in the jackpot game is executed (S2004). The details of this jackpot control process (S2004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After execution of big hit control processing (S2004), small hit control processing (S2005) for performing operation setting etc. of opening-and-closing board 65f1 during a small hit is performed. The details of this small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the small winning control process (S2005) ends, then the electric accessary product opening/closing process is executed (S2006). In this electric accessory opening/closing process (S2006), the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is executed. Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2007).

When the process of S2007 is finished, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "O" or "X") displayed on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S2008). Briefly, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 83 and Variable display of normal symbols is carried out. Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, a normal symbol lottery is carried out, and when the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 640a is activated for a predetermined time (1 second x 2 times, or 0.9 seconds x 2 times). times) is released.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2010). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S2010: Yes), the process proceeds to S2001, and the above-described processes after S2001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S2010: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the time, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S2011, S2012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2002 (S2012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001 to S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S2009, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S2009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 44 has been executed, so the power-off process from S2013 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) Send (S2014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S2009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2001 to S2008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S2001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot control process (S2004), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot control process (S2004).

In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2101). Specifically, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 33), whether the start of the jackpot is set (S706 in FIG. 33) or the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 38) Among them, when the start of the jackpot is set (see S1206 in FIG. 38), it is determined that the jackpot is started in the processing of S2101.

In the process of S2101, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start (S2101: Yes), an opening command for executing an opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot is set (S2102), and the flow path solenoid 65k. (see the upper part of FIG. 7) is started (S2103). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203v is set to ON (S2104), and this process is terminated. By setting the jackpot flag 203v to ON here, in the processing of S201 of the special symbol variation processing, it is determined that the jackpot is in progress, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed to start or stop. Since the process can be terminated without executing various processes for setting, it is possible to prevent the problem that the variable display is started even during the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not started (S2101: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot is in progress (S2105). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S2105, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S2105: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2105, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S2105: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2106), and the start timing of the new round If so (S2106: Yes), the opening operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S2107). Next, the read opening operation (opening/closing pattern) is set in the opening/closing plate 65f1 (S2108), and the process ends. Although illustration is omitted, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S2105: Yes), a round number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the start of a new round is issued. is set. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, when a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is received, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109), and if it is the start time of the ending effect (S2109 : Yes), an ending command is set (S2110), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 46). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2109, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2111). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S2111, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S2111: Yes), the big win end process for setting the game state after the big win ends (S2112), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2111: No), the winning process for performing the process corresponding to the winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is executed (S2113), then the specific winning opening ( Abnormality processing is executed to determine whether the ball entering the large opening 65a has been discharged normally (S2114), and this processing ends. Details of the winning process (S2113) and the abnormality process (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the jackpot ending process (S2112), which is one process in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. This jackpot end process (S2112) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S2112).

In the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S2201), and if the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S2201: Yes), the ball during this jackpot Since it means that the V winning prize switch 65e3 has passed, by setting 101 to the value of the variable probability counter 203g, the gaming state after the big hit is set to be a variable probability state (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2205. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2201, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is off (S2201: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S2203). If it is not a jackpot D (S2203: No), 101 is set to the value of the counter 203r during time saving (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if the jackpot is D (S2203: Yes), the process of S2204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2205. Thus, when the jackpot type is the jackpot D and the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in another big hit type, the time saving state is set 100 times after the big hit.

In the process of S2205, set a state command for notifying the state after the end of the jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 from each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving counter 203r (S2205), during the jackpot flag 203x, And the variable probability setting flag 203h are both set to OFF (S2206), and this process is terminated.

Next, details of the winning process (S2113) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S2113). This prize winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a.

In the winning process (S2113), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2301). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (3 seconds) ends. is. In the process of S2301, if it is not the round effective period (S2301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the current round is valid (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a has been detected (S2302), If the winning for the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is detected (S2302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2302, if winning to the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not detected (S2302: No), the processing of S2303 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2304), and if the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2306.

On the other hand, in the process of S2304, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S2304: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S2305). (S2305: Yes), the process proceeds to S2306.

In the process of S2306, the closing of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is set (S2306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2305 that the round time has not elapsed (S2305: No), the processes of S2306 and S2307 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2308.

In the processing of S2308, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S2308). Move on to processing. On the other hand, if the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2308: No), it means that it is the ball-striking period after closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, and then the probability variable effective flag 203o is turned on. (S2316). In the processing of S2316, if the variable probability effective flag 203o is off (S2316: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203o is ON (S2316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203p (S2317), then the value of the probability variable effective timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. 5 seconds) (S2318). Then, if the value of the variable probability effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S2318: No), the process proceeds to S2310, and the process of monitoring the ball entering the variable probability entrance 671 and updating the variable probability setting flag 203h is executed. do. As a result, if the probability variable effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3, so it is possible to set the probability variable gaming state in consideration of the ball blowing time. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the variable probability game state from being illegally passed through the V winning switch.

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable effective timer 203p is the upper limit value (S2318: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203o is set to OFF (S2319), the value of the probability variable effective timer 203p is reset (S2320), and this process is executed. finish.

In the process of S2310, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310), and if the ball has not passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310: No), the process proceeds to S2313. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passing counter 203i (S2311), and the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2312), S2313 to process.

In the process of S2313, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2313), and if the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S2313: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2313: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S2314), the variable probability effective flag 203o is set to ON (S2315), and this process is terminated.

Next, the abnormality processing (S2114) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S2114). This abnormality process (S2114) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), and as described above, the ball entered into the specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a is discharged normally. This is a process for determining whether or not the

In the abnormality process (S2114), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2401), and if not (S2401: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402).

In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ball ejection number counter 203q (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if the ball has not passed the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2404.

In the process of S2404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S2404). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S2404: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S2404: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is updated by adding 1 (S2405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit (3 seconds in this embodiment) (S2406), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit (S2406: No), End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S2406: Yes), then (S2407).

In the processing of S2407, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S2407: No), an error command is set (S2408), and the process proceeds to S2409. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally leaving the ball in the variable winning device 65 and flowing down the ball to the special discharge channel 65e2 during the ON period of the channel solenoid 65k after the start of the next big win. can.

On the other hand, in the process of S2407, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S2407: Yes), the process of S2408 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2409. In the processing of S2409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S2409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S2410). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203j, the discharged ball number counter 203q, and the variable probability passing counter 203i are reset (S2411), and the process is terminated.

By executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 50), the balls entering the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a are no longer discharged normally due to clogging of the balls inside the variable winning device 65. It is possible to detect the occurrence of a malfunction that occurs early and notify it. In addition, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally leaving the ball inside the variable prize winning device 65 during the big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the small winning control process (S2005), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning control process (S2005).

In the small hit control process (see FIG. 51), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S2501). In the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the small winning of the special symbol is started (S2105: Yes), the opening command of the small winning is set (S2502). Then, the small hit middle flag 203w is set to ON (S2503), and the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S2501: No), it is determined whether the flag 203w during the small hit is ON (S2504). During the special symbol small winning, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small winning (including during the special symbol small winning game). During the predetermined time after the end of the small winning game of the special symbol is included. In the process of S2504, if the flag 203w during the small hit is off (S2504: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2504, if it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203w is ON (S2504: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening (S2505), if it is the end timing of the opening (S2505: Yes), the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set (S2506), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2505, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the opening (S2505: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the opening pattern set for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (S2507). ). In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the opening pattern set in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (S2507: Yes), the ending command of a small hit is set (S2508), and this processing is executed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the set open pattern (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the special symbol small hit (S2509). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending. In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2509: Yes), the flag 203w during the small hit is set to OFF (S2510), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2509: No), the process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 52, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 53) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see FIG. 53, S4113), the power-off processing of S4116 is executed. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4116, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 53). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The game state notified by the command is set in the game state storage area 223h (S4011), then interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example, and the process of S4008 is performed via the processes from S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S4102 to S4110 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4111 and S4112 are preferable to be executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4110 are sent to the display control device 114. and transmit (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114. In the pending number display update process (S4106), the process of updating the display of the pending symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a rearrangement possible period (a period excluding the state during the jackpot game and the state without suspension), which will be described later, the suspension symbol display that was displayed in the order of establishment of the suspension starts to be displayed in a variable manner. They are sorted in order and displayed.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S4111). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process (S4111), in order to display the variable display effect in the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is A variable display setting process, which is a process for setting for transmission to the display control device 114, is executed (S4112). The details of this variable display setting process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4114 that the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 54, S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to ON (S4202). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type selection command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 on. Next, the stop type from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (completely off, reach out, small hit, jackpot A to D) is extracted (S4203), and this process is performed finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S<b>4203 is stored in the other memory area 223 z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 . In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable, and is referred to when the later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201: No), then the special figure 1 variation pattern from the main controller 110 It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S4204). In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4204, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4204: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM223 is set to ON (S4205), and the received special The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 1 (S4206), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (set the variable pattern command for the display of the first special symbol used).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4204: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4207). In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4207: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM223 is set to ON (S4208), and the received special The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4209), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format in which it can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process described later (see FIG. 55) , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for the display of the second special symbol used).

In the processing of S4207, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether a pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4210). When it is determined that the pending ball number command is received (S4210: Yes), the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol pending ball of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command The value of the number counter 203e (that is, the number of holding balls for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided in accordance with the extracted counter value. The corresponding counter value is updated (S4211), and the process ends. More specifically, when the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the RAM 223, and the second special symbol reserved ball number When the value of the counter 203e is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2.

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). Each time, by the processing of S4211, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. It is possible to match the values of the ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203d or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol reserved ball number of the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Also, in the process of S4210, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4210: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4212). In the process of S4212, when it is determined that either the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S4212: Yes), the confirmation display of the special symbol corresponding to the command is set (S4213) , the process ends. Specifically, in the process of S4213, when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received, the confirmation display of the first special design is set, and when the special figure 2 confirmation command is received, the confirmation display of the second special symbol set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4212, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 confirmation command nor the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S4212: No), it is determined whether or not the state command is received (S4214), the state If the command has been received (S4214: Yes), information corresponding to the game state notified by the received state command is set (stored) in the game state storage area 223h (S4215), and this processing is terminated. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4214 that the status command has not been received (S4214: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4216), and this processing ends. In the process of S4215, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) is based on the first or second variable pattern command received from main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on third pattern display device 81. , generates a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and executes processing of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 . Also, based on the extracted stop type (completely out, reach out, jackpot E, F), the display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type, or the display special figure 2 Execute the process to set the stop type command.

In the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 55), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4401). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is off (S4401: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process of S4406 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S4401: Yes), based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the fluctuation of the first special symbol of this time Each process of S4402 to S4405 for determining the detailed mode of display is executed.

More specifically, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF (S4402), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is executed (S4403). The details of this variation pattern selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 (S4404), the counter value is set to the dependent special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

In the process of S4406, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM223 is on (S4406), and if the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is off (S4406: No), the main controller 110 Since it is in a state where it has not received the special figure 2 variation pattern command, the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is on (S4406: Yes), based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the second special symbol fluctuation of this time Each process of S4407 to S4410 for determining the detailed mode of display is executed.

Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF (S4407), and then, based on the extracted fluctuation pattern, the second special symbol display fluctuation pattern command is set (S4408). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (S4409), the counter value is set to the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411.

In the processing of S4411, it is determined whether either the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4411). Then, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 are off (S4411: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, when it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S4411: Yes), the flag determined as on is turned off (S4412), then, in the processing of S4203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), set the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command (S4413). Next, based on the set stop type, a display special figure 1 stop type command or a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 is generated (S4414), and this End the process.

In addition, the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a big hit, and the small hit In that case, the small hit type is notified, and in the case of loss, complete loss or reach loss is notified.

By being configured in this manner, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to variably display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection process (S4403) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern selection process (S4403). This variation pattern selection process (S4403) is one process of the variation display setting process (S4112) (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and details the variation pattern of the first special symbol. This is processing for setting the mode.

In the variation pattern selection process (S4403), first, in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), it is determined whether the super reach is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 ( S4501), when it is determined that the extracted variation pattern is super reach (S4501: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the set stop type is small hit C (S4502). In the processing of S4502, if it is determined that the set stop type is not a small hit C (S4502: No), then it is determined whether or not the set stop type is a big hit D (S4503), When it is determined that the stop type is not jackpot D (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4504. Also, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not super reach (S4501: No), since there is no possibility of setting special super reach at this time, the processes of S4502 and S4503 are skipped. , the process proceeds to S4504.

In the process of S4504, in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), based on the variation pattern extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the detailed aspect of the current variation pattern A determination is made, and the process proceeds to S4506.

On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if it is determined that the set stop type is a small hit C (S4502: Yes), or in the process of S4503, if the set stop type is a jackpot D If so (S4503: Yes), the process proceeds to S4505 for setting the special super reach (see FIG. 9B). In the process of S4505, the aspect of the current variation pattern is determined to be special super reach (see FIG. 9B) (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506. In the processing of S4506, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined variation pattern to the display control device 114 is set (S4506), and this processing ends.

By executing this variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 56), only when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit D or a small hit C, a special super reach (see FIG. 9(b)) can be executed. Of the lottery results in which the special super reach (see FIG. 9B) is set, the jackpot D has a small number of prize balls, and neither the variable probability state nor the time saving state is given after the jackpot, so the degree of advantage for the player is high. lower. On the other hand, when it comes to the small win C, after the small win C ends, the chance mode A in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed is set over 100 times of fluctuation display, so that the player can get 100. You can receive almost the same profit as when a short period of time is set. Therefore, when the special super reach is executed, it is possible to play the game hoping for a small win C rather than a big win D. This is because the number of prize balls (approximately 500) that can be obtained when the jackpot D is reached allows the lottery of the first special symbol to be performed only about 30 to 40 times after the jackpot.

In a general pachinko machine, when the variable display is executed, the game is played with the expectation that the third symbols with the same number will be aligned (that is, a big win), but the pachinko of the present embodiment In the machine 10, when the special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the performance result in the hope that the third symbols with the same number are not aligned. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the game can be played in anticipation of a loss (small win C) with a high degree of advantage rather than a big win (big win D) with a small degree of advantage.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 70. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 to start.

Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 57) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 58, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 68A), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 68A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59B), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 59B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 59B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure recovery. Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59(a), command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 59(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 59(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 59B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 26, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 60, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 61(b). FIG. 61(b) is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpots A to F, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out) stop type table corresponding to is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description continues. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command processing (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description continues. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command processing (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 62(b). FIG. 62(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. This number-of-rounds command process is for executing a process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description continues. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). Otherwise (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 61(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 61(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 61(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 65, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 65, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 68(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). FIG. 68B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 60 to 64) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 65 to 67) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) (see S7501: No in FIG. 68A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S7503), which is a part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (not shown) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 59(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode, based on a small win in the special symbol lottery. In the chance mode A, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened (to 3 seconds), and the second special is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol (the continuous mode is likely to be set when the jackpot is won). Since the lottery of symbols can be easily executed, the player can play the game with a strong expectation of a big win. In addition, since the normal mode can be shifted to the chance mode A without going through the big win, the game can be inflated even if the big win has not been won for a long period of time. Therefore, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained by inserting the chance mode A. Furthermore, the length of the given chance mode A (the number of lotteries) is configured to differ for each small hit type. As a result, the player who sensed the small win can play the game expecting that the chance mode A is the small win type set for a longer period. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol, the super ready-to-reach mode with a variation time of 60 seconds is determined only in the case of a big win or a small win. . That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the super reach is not set. By constructing in this way, when it is found that the variable display being executed is super ready-to-win (when the variable time exceeds 30 seconds), the player is made to recognize that it will be a small win or a big win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the present embodiment, only when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit, a special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds can be determined. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to recognize that a big win will occur when it is found that the variable display being executed is the special reach (when the variable time exceeds 60 seconds). Therefore, the player can be made aware of the fact that a big win will occur before the end of the variable display, so that the player can watch over the result of the presentation with peace of mind during the remaining variable time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a special super reach is provided as one type of effect mode when super reach is determined. This special super ready-to-win performance mode is configured so that it can be determined only when the lottery result of special symbols is a big hit D or a small hit C. - 特許庁Since the jackpot D has a small number of prize balls and neither the variable probability state nor the time-saving state is provided after the jackpot, the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, when it comes to the small win C, after the small win C ends, the chance mode A is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed over a maximum of 100 times of fluctuation display, so that the player can win 100. You can receive almost the same profit as when a short period of time is set. Therefore, when the special super reach is executed, it is possible to play the game hoping for a small win C rather than a big win D.

In a general pachinko machine, when the variable display is executed, the game is played with the expectation that the third symbols with the same number will be aligned (that is, a big win), but the pachinko of the present embodiment In the machine 10, when the special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the performance result in the hope that the third symbols with the same number are not aligned. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the game can be played in anticipation of a loss (small win C) with a high degree of advantage rather than a big win (big win D) with a small degree of advantage.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is subtracted each time the special symbol lottery is executed regardless of whether the lottery is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery lottery. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is subtracted only when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, when the chance mode A is set, regardless of the number of reserved balls in the lottery of the first special symbol, the lottery of the advantageous special symbol 2 can be reliably performed a predetermined number of times. can. Therefore, expectations for the chance mode A can be further enhanced.

In the first embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the chance mode A is always set. It is good also as a structure which provides hit classification. Thus, even if super reach occurs, it is possible to provide a case where chance mode A is not set.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot D, which is the most disadvantageous to the player among the jackpot types (that is, the time-saving state is not given and the number of prize balls is the smallest), or the jackpot D, which is the most advantageous for the player Although it is configured to provide a special super reach that is selected only when a small win C is achieved, the condition for generating the special super reach is not limited to this. For example, the special super reach is executed only when the most advantageous jackpot A or the most advantageous small hit C among the jackpot types to be won in the lottery of the first special symbols. may By constructing in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the most advantageous big win or the most advantageous small win will occur before the symbols stop, so that the player can feel a sense of security. can be done.

In the first embodiment, after executing the lottery for the special symbols, the winning flag 203s is referred to, and when the winning flag 203s is on, the lottery result is overwritten without exception, but it is limited to this. is not. For example, the win flag 203s may be referred to before executing the special symbol lottery, and if it is on, the lottery result may be decided as a failure and the special symbol lottery may be skipped. With this configuration, the processing load can be reduced when the hit flag 203s is on.

In the first embodiment, the normal (low probability) state of the normal design and the time saving (high probability) state of the normal design are common (3 seconds) for the fluctuation time of the normal design, and the probability of winning the normal design. Although it is configured that there is not much difference in the opening period of the electric accessory 640a in the case of winning the normal symbol, it is not limited to this. When the chance mode A is set, it may be determined arbitrarily within a range in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting (lottery for special symbols is more likely to be executed). More specifically, for example, in order to more reliably reduce the number of balls held when hitting right in normal mode, for example, the probability of winning a normal symbol is lowered (for example, to 1/3), or an electric role The opening period of the object 640a may be shortened (for example, 0.7 seconds x 1 time), or the variation time of normal symbols may be lengthened (for example, 10 seconds). In this way, by making a difference in the control between the normal low state of the normal pattern and the time-saving state of the normal pattern, it is possible to more reliably reduce the number of balls held when hitting right in the normal mode. Therefore, by always hitting right even in the normal mode, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which only the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous without reducing the number of balls held is performed.

In this embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the chance mode A, a short variation (3 seconds) is selected, but when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the same as the normal mode The configuration was such that control was executed. On the other hand, the table for chance A may be changed so that the variation time becomes longer (for example, it always becomes 120 seconds) when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, if a ball is hit left by mistake in chance mode A, or if a part of the ball hit by hitting right enters the first ball entrance 64, the ball will enter the first ball opening 64. Since the variation time of the first special symbol based on the ball becomes longer, the variation display of the second special symbol can be performed a plurality of times during the long variation time. Therefore, when hitting to the right in the chance mode A, more advantageous second special symbol lotteries can be executed.

In the first embodiment, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to as a variation pattern table over a specific number of special symbol lotteries under the condition that the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit (chance mode A), but the condition for setting the chance mode A is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the variation pattern table to be referred to is changed according to the time information. Specifically, a known RTC (Real-Time Clock) capable of measuring time is connected to input/output port 205 of main controller 110 so that main controller 110 can grasp the current time. Then, in a predetermined time zone (for example, 10:00 AM to 11:00 AM), if the game state is a normal state, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed, and other than the above If the gaming state is the normal state in the time period of , the normal table 202d1 may be referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the time period in which the chance mode A is referred to.

In the first embodiment, when the chance mode is set to A, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the frequency of lottery of the second special symbol is increased, which is more advantageous than the normal mode. However, it is not limited to this. In the chance mode A, the lottery for the first special symbol may also be advantageous. Specifically, while the chance mode A is set, even if the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit C or D, the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing plate 65f1 that can easily pass through the V prize switch 65e3 (Fig. 7) may be set. That is, in the chance mode A, an opening/closing pattern that easily passes through the V prize switch 65e3 may be set for all jackpot types. By constructing in this way, even when the chance mode A is set in a state in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists, and the reserved balls which become the big hits C and D exist in the reserved state, an advantageous opening/closing pattern can be obtained. can be set. In addition, even when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in spite of hitting to the right in the chance mode A and results in either a big win C or D, an advantageous opening/closing pattern is provided. can be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the absurdity that a disadvantageous opening/closing pattern is set even though the game is played according to the instruction (launching direction) on the screen in the chance mode A and the jackpot is won.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to easily become an advantageous jackpot type, but it may be configured to switch the special symbols in which the advantageous jackpot type is likely to be selected according to the state. . Specifically, for example, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the ratio of setting an advantageous opening and closing pattern is reduced (for example, 70%), and when the first special symbol is a big hit Depending on the situation, the ratio of advantageous opening/closing patterns may be set higher than the second special symbol (for example, 100%) or lower (for example, 50%). More specifically, for example, in the chance mode A, if the lottery of the first special symbol started in the presence of the ball of the second special symbol is a big hit, the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit. In other cases, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set at a higher rate (for example, 100%) than it is, and in other cases, the rate is lower than the jackpot ( For example, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 that is advantageous in 50%) may be set. With this configuration, when the player hits to the right in the chance mode A and the ball accidentally enters the first ball entrance 64 and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the definite variable state. In addition, in the chance mode A, since the variation time of the second special symbol is short (to 3 seconds), it becomes difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls (accumulating one reserved ball is the best), Even if the change to left-handed hitting is made after confirming that the reserves are accumulated, the possibility that the reserves of the second special symbol are digested before the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 can be increased. can. Therefore, the irregular game method of hitting left after the second special pattern is suspended in the chance mode A is suppressed, and the player continues to hit right during the chance mode A and accidentally enters the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to make it possible to receive benefits only when the ball enters the ball.

<Modified Example of First Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, in the normal mode, the variation pattern of the variation time of the second special symbol that is extremely long compared to the variation time of the first special symbol (super long variation of 10 minutes variation time) is determined. be done. As a result, the game efficiency in the case of hitting to the right in the normal mode is reduced, and an irregular game method in which the hitting to the right is always performed in the normal mode is suppressed.

However, since it adopts a simultaneous variation method (a method in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel), for example, the second special symbol holding ball is four. There is a possibility that a player will play an irregular game method such as right-handed hitting until the number of balls is accumulated, returning to left-handed hitting at the stage when reserved balls are accumulated, and execution of lottery for the first special symbol.

On the other hand, in this modification, when the second special symbol reserved balls are accumulated (one or more) in the normal mode and the ball is returned to left-handed, and the first special symbol lottery is executed, As the variation time of the first special symbol, the same ultra-long variation (10 minutes) as the variation time of the second special symbol is set. As a result, when right-handed hitting is performed in the normal mode and left-handed hitting is resumed in a state in which the balls held in the second special pattern are accumulated, both the first special pattern and the second special pattern are changed to a very long period of 10 minutes. Therefore, it is possible to form an extremely disadvantageous state in which a special symbol lottery is executed only about every 10 minutes, so that the player can continue to hit left in the normal mode more reliably.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed. The only difference is that part of the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the modification of the first embodiment>
First, the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. This fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table referred to for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display indicating the lottery result when the lottery for the special symbol is executed, as in the first embodiment. is.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the variation pattern table 202d in this modification includes a normal (special figure 2 no hold) table 202d11 as a table used to determine the variation pattern in the normal mode, and a normal A table 202d12 for (when special figure 2 is reserved) is provided. Normal (when special figure 2 is not reserved) table 202d11 is a table that is referred to when there is no second special symbol reserved ball (0 pieces), and normal (when special figure 2 is reserved) table 202d12 , is a table referred to when there are (one or more) reserved balls of the second special symbol.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a table 202d21 for consecutive residence/chance B (first half) as a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in consecutive residence mode (variable probability state) and chance mode B (time saving state), and continuous A table 202d22 for sho/chance B (latter half) is provided. The consecutive villa/chance B (first half) table 202d21 is a data table that is referred to when six or more remaining lotteries remain in the consecutive villa mode or chance mode B. Further, the table 202d22 for consecutive residence/chance B (latter half) is a data table that is referred to when the number of remaining lotteries is 5 or less.

The variation pattern table 202d is provided with a chance A (first half) table 202d31 and a chance A (second half) table 202d32 as tables used for determining the variation pattern in the chance mode A. The chance A (first half) table 202d31 is a data table that is referred to in the chance mode A when six or more lotteries remain. Also, the table 202d32 for chance A (second half) is a data table that is referred to when the number of remaining lotteries is five or less.

First, the table referred to in normal mode will be described. In addition, since the table 202d11 for normal (when special figure 2 is not reserved) is the same as the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15(b)) of the above-described first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the table 202d12 for normal (with special figure 2 reservation) is referred to, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the result (stop type), a super long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (10 minutes) is determined.

In the normal mode, when there is a second special symbol reserved ball, 10 minutes is determined not only for the variation time for the second special symbol but also for the variation time for the first special symbol. It is possible to increase the penalty for continuing to hit right in . That is, in the normal mode, the occurrence of a reserved ball in the second special symbol is unlikely to occur unless the game method of intentionally aiming at the second ball entrance 640 and hitting the ball is continued. Therefore, as a penalty for a player who intentionally executes an irregular game method, while the second special symbol reserved ball remains, the variable display of the first special symbol is also the variable display of the second special symbol. is also configured to set an ultra-long fluctuation. As a result, even if the player quits the irregular game method and returns to left-handed, the lottery for the special symbols is performed only about every 10 minutes (the lottery for the first special symbol is difficult to execute). state can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the effect of deterring the player from playing an irregular game method.

Next, tables referred to in the consecutive mode and the chance mode B will be described. The table 202d21 for consecutive villas/chance B (first half) is the same as the table 202d2 for consecutive villas/chance B (see FIG. 16(a)) of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. . As shown in FIG. 72(a), when the table 202d22 for consecutive house/chance B (second half) is referred to, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is uniformly 0 regardless of the lottery time of the second special symbol. A .7 second ultra-short variation is determined. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same as the consecutive residence/chance B (first half) table 202d21 (the consecutive residence/chance B table 202d2 in the first embodiment).

In the consecutive game mode or chance mode B, the correct game method is to play the game by hitting to the right. When the chance B (first half) table 202d21 is referred to, a long variation time is set just before the end of the consecutive mode or the chance mode B, and during the variation display of the long variation time, many held balls are accumulated. may be lost. That is, at the end of the consecutive mode or the chance mode B, there may be a state in which two or more reserved balls of the second special symbol exist. In this case, even if the player returns to the normal mode and returns to left-handed hitting according to the correct game method, the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern becomes 1 or more at the time when the lottery of the first special pattern is executed, and a penalty occurs. (The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 minutes). In this way, if a player is penalized even though he or she has played a correct game method, the player may be dissatisfied.

Therefore, in this modification, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.7 seconds) over the variation of the special symbol 5 times at the end of the continuous mode and the chance mode B in which the game is played by hitting to the right. It is constructed in such a manner that it is difficult for a new ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during fluctuation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of held balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the continuous mode or the chance mode B. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalties are imposed on players who play the correct game method.

Next, the table referred to in chance mode A will be described. Note that the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is the same as the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 72(b), when the chance A (second half) table 202d32 is referred to, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is uniformly 0.7 seconds regardless of the lottery time of the second special symbol. is determined. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same as the chance A (first half) table 202d31 (chance A table 202d3 in the first embodiment).

In the chance mode A, as in the consecutive mode and the chance mode B, the correct game method is to play the game by hitting to the right. Therefore, when the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is referred to when the number of fluctuations set for chance mode A is five or less, a long fluctuation time is set just before the end of chance mode A. During the variable display of the variable time, a large number of held balls may accumulate. That is, even if the chance mode A is finished and the game is shifted to the normal mode, even if the left-hand shot is returned, the second special symbol reserved ball becomes 1 or more at the time when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and the penalty is imposed. There is a possibility that it will occur (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol will be 10 minutes).

Therefore, regarding the table 202d32 for Chance A (second half), as with the table 202d22 for Renso/Chance B (second half) described above, it is made difficult for a new ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during fluctuation. is set to super short fluctuation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of pending balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the chance mode A. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalties are imposed on players who play the correct game method.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. First, FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311) executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311), like the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, selects a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. This is the process of selection.

Among the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311) in the modification of the first embodiment, in each process of S601 to S603, S605, and S608 to S610, the first special symbol variation in the first embodiment respectively In the pattern selection process (see FIG. 32), the same processes as S601 to S603, S605, and S608 to S610 are executed.

Also, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) in the modification of the first embodiment, in the process of S603, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (that is, the chance mode is A). If it is determined (S603: Yes), the chance A time selection process for selecting the variation pattern for the lottery of the first special symbol executed in the chance mode A is executed (S611), and the process proceeds to S608. Transition. The details of the selection process at chance A (S611) will be described later with reference to FIG. 74(a).

Also, in the process of S605, when it is determined that both the values of the variable probability counter 203g and the time saving counter 203r are 0 (that is, the normal mode) (S605: Yes), the first A normal selection process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery is executed (S612), and the process proceeds to S608. The details of this normal selection process (S612) will be described later with reference to FIG. 74(b). On the other hand, in the process of S605, when it is determined that either the probability variation counter 203g or the time saving counter 203r is a value of 1 or more (that is, the continuous villa mode or the chance mode B) (S605: No) , consecutive mode, or chance mode B for selecting a variation pattern for the lottery of the first special symbol is executed (S613), and the process proceeds to S608. The details of this continuous residence time selection process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74(a), details of the above-described chance A time selection process (S611) will be described. This chance A time selection process (S611) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the chance mode A, as described above.

When this chance A time selection process (S611) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 5 (S2601), and if it is determined to be greater than 5 (S2601: Yes) Then, from the variation pattern table 202d, the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is read out as a table for determining the variation pattern of the current variation display (S2602), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2601, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 5 or less (S2601: No), the table for determining the variation pattern of the current variation display is selected from the variation pattern table 202d. The table 202d32 for A (latter half) is read (S2603), and this processing ends.

By executing this chance A time selection process (see FIG. 74(a)), when a special symbol lottery is executed at the end of chance mode A (the number of remaining lotteries is 5 times or less), chance A ( The variation pattern can be determined by referring to the table 202d32 for the second half). That is, as described above, the super-short variation is set so as to make it difficult for a new ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of pending balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the chance mode A. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalties are imposed on players who play the correct game method.

Next, details of the normal selection process (S612) will be described with reference to FIG. 74(b). This normal time selection process (S612) is, as described above, a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal mode.

When this normal time selection process (S612) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S2701), and if it is determined to be 0 ( S2701: Yes), from the variation pattern table 202d, as a table for determining the variation pattern of the current variation display, the table 202d11 for normal (when there is no special figure 2 pending) is read (S2702), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S2701: No), from the variation pattern table 202d, the current variation As a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of display, the table 202d12 for normal (when special figure 2 is reserved) is read (S2703), and this process is terminated.

By executing this normal time selection process (see FIG. 74(b)), when the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in the normal mode and the first special symbol lottery is executed, super long Variation (600 seconds) can be set. By constructing so that 10 minutes is determined not only for the variation time of the second special symbol but also for the variation time of the first special symbol when there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol in the normal mode. , the penalty for continuing to hit right in normal mode can be increased. That is, in the normal mode, the occurrence of a reserved ball in the second special symbol is unlikely to occur unless the game method of intentionally aiming at the second ball entrance 640 and hitting the ball is continued. Therefore, as a penalty for a player who intentionally executes an irregular game method, while the second special symbol reserved ball remains, the variable display of the first special symbol is also the variable display of the second special symbol. It is also configured to set super long fluctuations. As a result, even if the player quits the irregular game method and returns to left-handed, the lottery for the special symbols is performed only about every 10 minutes (the lottery for the first special symbol is difficult to execute). state can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the effect of deterring the player from playing an irregular game method.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the details of the above-described continuous residence time selection process (S613) will be described. As described above, this continuous house selection process (S613) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the continuous house mode and the chance mode B.

When this consecutive residence time selection process (S613) is executed, first, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is determined whether it is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less (S2801), and out of the range of 1 to 5 ( If it is determined that the value is 0 or 6 or more (S2801: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203r is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less (S2802). In the process of S2802, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203r is outside the range of 1 to 5 (the value is 0 or 6 or more) (S2802: No), the remaining number of times of the probability variation state remains 6 times or more or the remaining number of times in the time saving state is 6 or more. ) table 202d21 (S2803), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is within the range of 1 or more and 5 or less (S2801: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more and within the range of 5 or less If it is determined that there is (S2802: Yes), the table 202d22 for continuous residence/chance B (latter half) is read as a table for determining the variation pattern of the current variation display (S2804), and this processing ends.

By executing this continuous residence time selection process (see FIG. 75), it is possible to switch the variation pattern table according to the remaining number of times of the probability variable state and the time saving state. As a result, the variation time of the second special symbol can be extremely shortened (0.7 seconds) over the variation of the special symbol 5 times in the final stage of the continuous game mode and the chance mode B in which the game is played by hitting to the right. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for a new ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol will be 1 or more at the end of the consecutive villa mode or the chance mode B. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalties are imposed on players who play the correct game method.

Although not shown, in this modified example, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. This second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is similar to the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73). (chance mode B or normal mode), the above-described chance A time selection process (see FIG. 74(a)), normal time selection process (see FIG. 74(b)), continuous time selection By executing one of the processes (see FIG. 75), the process of selecting one of the tables defined in the variation pattern table 202d is executed. The contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 are the same as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment, in the normal mode, when the second special symbol reserved ball is accumulated (one or more), it returns to the left hitting, and the first special symbol When the lottery is executed, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to the same super long variation (600 seconds) as the variation time of the second special symbol. As a result, when right-handed hitting is performed in the normal mode and left-handed hitting is resumed in a state in which the balls held in the second special pattern are accumulated, both the first special pattern and the second special pattern are changed to a very long period of 10 minutes. Therefore, it is possible to form an extremely disadvantageous state in which a special symbol lottery is executed only about every 10 minutes, so that the player can continue to hit left in the normal mode more reliably.

In addition, in this modification, in the consecutive mode, chance mode A, and chance mode B in which the game is played by hitting right, the number of remaining lotteries is within 5 times (by executing the lottery of special symbols within 5 times) It is configured so that the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.7 seconds) when the situation changes to the normal mode). This makes it difficult for new balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 during fluctuations, so at the end of the consecutive mode or chance mode B, the number of balls held for the second special symbol can be 1 or more. can be lessened. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalties are imposed on players who play the correct game method.

In addition, in this modification, the super-short variation (0.7 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol only when the number of remaining lotteries in consecutive mode, chance mode A, or chance mode B is 5. Although the case has been described as being within the number of times, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that only one remaining super-short variation (0.7 seconds) is selected. It may be a selected configuration.

In this modification, in the normal mode, when there is a second special symbol reserved ball, the first special symbol variation time is extremely long (10 minutes), but the first special symbol variation time The condition for switching to super long variation (600 seconds) is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to select a super-long variation (600 seconds) as the variation pattern of the first special symbol when there is a reserved ball of a normal symbol.

In this modification, at the timing when the chance mode A ends (when the last variation display of the chance mode A ends), an effect (see FIG. 10(b)) is executed to notify the player to return to left-handed hitting. However, the execution timing of the main effect is not limited to this. For example, an effect (see FIG. 10(b)) may be executed to notify the player to return to left-handed hitting at the start of the variation of the last variation display in the chance mode A. Alternatively, during the chance mode A, the chance At the timing when it is determined that the reserved balls for the end of mode A have been reserved, an effect (see FIG. 10(b)) of notifying the player to return to left-handed hitting may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a state in which a plurality of reserved balls of the second special symbol exist at the time when the chance mode A ends.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment and the modification of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol in the normal mode is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short (the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), and in a normal state of disadvantage, it is possible to add excitement to the game even if a big win does not occur.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is set after the big hit, the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state The normal mode and the chance mode A are switched according to the number of times. As a result, the chance mode A is set periodically to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the content of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed. The content of the RAM 203 provided in the control device 110 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. be. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. FIG. 76(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the ROM202 in the second embodiment has the small hit type selection table 202e deleted from the configuration of the ROM202 provided in the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. and a new variation pattern scenario table 202f is added. The details of this variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 76(b).

FIG. 76(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f. This variation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines the correspondence relationship (variation pattern scenario) between the number of lotteries of special symbols and the variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern for each last big win type. . At the end of the jackpot, among the fluctuation pattern scenarios defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f, a scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set, and at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern table prescribed in the scenario is referred to and the fluctuation pattern is determined. be.

First, if the previous jackpot type is other than jackpot D (that is, jackpots A to C, jackpots E and F) (if the ball passes the V prize switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variable state is given 100 times, and the V prize switch If you do not pass 65e3, the time saving state will be given 100 times). As shown in FIG. 76(b), among the variation pattern scenarios set when the previous jackpot type is other than the jackpot D, the number of special symbol lotteries is in the range of 1 to 100 times, as a variation pattern table. A table 202d2 for sho/chance B (see FIG. 16(a)) is associated. As a result, even if the variable probability state (continuous mode) is set after the big hit, or the time saving state (chance mode B) is set, by aiming at the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, the player can It is possible to form a state in which the determination of the advantageous second special symbol is likely to be executed.

In addition, the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15(b)) is associated with the range of 101 to 150 for the number of lotteries of the special symbols as the variation pattern table. For this reason, if the consecutive mode or chance mode B is set after the big hit, and the lottery of the special pattern exceeds 100 times without winning the big hit, the super long fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected. Therefore, if the first special symbol lottery is not executed by hitting to the left, it is possible to form a state in which the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated (when hitting to the right, the lottery of special symbols is executed only once every 10 minutes). .

Further, the range of the number of lotteries of special symbols of 151 to 160 is associated with a chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16(b)) as a variation pattern table. Therefore, when the lottery for the special pattern is executed 50 times after exiting the continuous mode or the chance mode B, the lottery for the special pattern can be shifted to the chance mode A for 10 times thereafter. Therefore, even if the continuous mode (variable probability state) or the chance mode B (time saving state), which is advantageous for the player, ends and shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode, the game is played until the chance mode A is set. The player can be tempted to continue the Therefore, in the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for playing the game from decreasing.

A normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15(b)) is associated as a fluctuation pattern table in the range of 161 to 200 for the number of lotteries of special symbols. In other words, the normal mode continues over 40 special symbol lotteries. Although not shown, hereinafter, the chance mode A of 10 times and the normal mode of 40 times are alternately repeated. That is, the number of special symbol lotteries is in the range of 201 to 210, 251 to 260, 301 to 310, . . . ), the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16(b)) is referred to. On the other hand, the number of special symbol lotteries is in the range of 211 to 250, 261 to 300, 311 to 350, . . . During the lottery), the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15(b)) is referred to.

In this way, every time the lottery of special symbols is executed 40 times in the normal mode, the game is shifted to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode, so that the game can be played until the next chance mode A. can make you want to continue. Therefore, since the motivation for the game of the player can be improved, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the previous big win type was the big win D (when the time saving state of the normal pattern is not given after the big win), the number of lotteries of the special symbols is in the range of 1 to 25, and the normal table 202d1 ( (see FIG. 15(b)) are associated. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot D, only the super-long variation (600 seconds) is selected when the second special symbol lottery is executed over 25 special symbol lotteries. Therefore, if the first special symbol lottery is not executed by hitting to the left, the game efficiency will be extremely deteriorated (when hitting to the right, the lottery of special symbols will be executed only once every 10 minutes).

In addition, a chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16(b)) is associated as a variation pattern table in the range of 26 to 50 special symbol lottery numbers. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times after the end of the big win D, the chance mode A can be shifted to the special symbol lottery 25 times thereafter.

After that, the normal mode in which the special symbol lottery is performed 25 times and the chance mode A in which the special symbol lottery is performed 25 times are alternately repeated. Therefore, it becomes a different jackpot type, and the number of times of lottery of special symbols in one chance mode A increases (10 times → 25 times) than after exiting the consecutive mode or chance mode B, and once The number of lotteries for special symbols in the normal mode is reduced (40 times→25 times). In other words, an opening/closing pattern (see the middle part of FIG. 7) that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is set, and as a remedy for the most disadvantageous jackpot that does not give the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the normal state after the jackpot is set. , It is possible to make it more advantageous than other jackpot types (increase the ratio of chance mode A). Therefore, even when the most disadvantageous jackpot D is achieved, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation to play from declining.

Thus, in the second embodiment, in the most disadvantageous normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), normal mode and chance mode A are selected according to the number of times of lottery of special symbols. It is configured to switch, and is configured to shift to the chance mode A periodically. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the most disadvantageous normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 77, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment has the small hit medium flag 203w and the chance mode counter 203x deleted from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, and the variation counter 203ab and a scenario storage area 203ac are newly added.

The fluctuation number counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the big win. A variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the scenario storage area 203ac based on the value of the variation number counter 203ab and the variation pattern scenario set at the end of the previous jackpot (Fig. 79, S622). The value of the variation number counter 203ab is incremented by 1 every time the game state update process 3 is executed (see S411 in FIG. 78). Unless the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ab is retained even if the power is cut off, and is reset to 0 at the end of the jackpot (see S2213 in FIG. 80).

The scenario storage area 203ac is a storage area for storing a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the previous jackpot type. When a special symbol lottery is executed, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ac and the value of the variation number counter 203ab. be done. The scenario storage area 203ab stores a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot (see S2212 in FIG. 80).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. FIG. First, the game state update process 3 (S321) executed in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment will be described. This game state update process 3 (S321) is a process for updating the counter etc. regarding the state of the pachinko machine 10, like the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the game state update process 3 (S321). In the processing of S401 to S404, S407, and S408 in the game state update process 3 (S321) in the second embodiment, S401 to S404 and S404 in the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S407 and S408 is executed.

Further, in the game state update process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the game state has not been changed (S407: No), or the game state is normal state (S407: Yes), and when a state command for notifying the changed game state (normal state) to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S408), the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ab 1 is added and updated (S411), and this process is terminated. By updating the variation number counter 203ab in this game state update process 3 (see FIG. 78), when determining the variation pattern after that, the variation pattern table is updated based on the correct number of special symbol lotteries. can be selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 79, in the first special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29), the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is executed instead. 1 special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322). This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322) is similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and selects a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. This is a process for selection.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79), in each process of S601, S602, and S608 to S610, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32) , S601, S602, and S608 to S610 are executed.

In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S601), and if it is a big hit When the jackpot type selection process (S602) is completed, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ab is read.

Next, a variation pattern table corresponding to the read value of the variation number counter 203ab is identified based on the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ac (S622), and the process proceeds to S608. Thus, in the process of S608, the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of variations after the big win and the variation pattern scenario set at the end of the big win is referred to, and the variation pattern corresponding to the current lottery result is selected. can be done. That is, when selecting the variation pattern table, by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to according to the number of special symbol lotteries, the degree of advantage can be varied according to the number of lotteries. In particular, in the most disadvantageous normal state for the player (low-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), it is possible to periodically shift to the advantageous chance mode A, so that the game in the normal state is improved. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the monotony.

Although not shown, in the second embodiment, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. be. This second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 is similar to the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79), depending on the value of the variation counter 203ab and the set variation pattern scenario. Then, a process of selecting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol of this time is executed. Since the content of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 is the same as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) described with reference to FIG. 79, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot end processing 3 (S2121) executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 47) instead of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment will be described. . This jackpot end process 3 (S2121) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot end, like the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80). Among the jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, each processing of S2201 to S2206 is the same as each processing of S2201 to S2206 of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

In addition, in the jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S2206 is completed, then, from the variation pattern scenario table 202f (see FIG. 76(b)), corresponding to this jackpot type A variation pattern scenario is read (S2211), and the read variation pattern scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 203ac (S2212).

More specifically, if the type of jackpot this time is other than jackpot D (jackpots A to C, E, and F), the table 202d2 for consecutive house/chance B will be drawn over 100 special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot. is referenced, the normal table 202d1 is referenced in the 101st to 150th times, and thereafter the chance A table 202d3 is referenced over 10 special symbol lotteries (chance mode A), and 40 times. A scenario is set in which a state in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to (normal mode) is alternately repeated over the lottery of special symbols. On the other hand, if the current jackpot is jackpot D, the state in which the chance A table 202d3 is referred to over 25 special symbol lotteries (chance mode A) and the normal state over 25 special symbol lotteries A scenario is set in which a state (normal mode) in which the application table 202d1 is referred to is alternately repeated.

When the process of S2212 is finished, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ab is reset (S2213), and this process is finished. By executing this jackpot ending process 3 (see FIG. 80), it is possible to set a variation pattern scenario according to the jackpot type, so that it is possible to diversify the variation pattern scenario.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in the normal state, according to the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win, the variation pattern table referred to for selecting the variation pattern is set. It is configured to switch, and in the normal state, it is configured to periodically shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode. As a result, in the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player, the degree of advantage can be changed periodically, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern scenario set after the jackpot is changed according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is disadvantageous (jackpot D), an advantageous variation pattern scenario is set. It is configured. That is, the number of special symbol changes is large until one chance mode A ends, and the number of special symbol lotteries from the end of one chance mode A until the next chance mode A is set is large. It is configured so that a small number of scenarios are set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's desire to play from decreasing when a disadvantageous jackpot hits, and to allow the player to continue playing for a longer period of time. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern table to be referred to is switched according to the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the big win, but it is not limited to this. For example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is depressed), the variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched according to the number of special symbol lotteries. . That is, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the variation pattern scenario table 202f may be referred to, and the scenario set at the end of the jackpot D may be stored in the scenario storage area 203ac. By constructing in this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is easy to shift to the chance mode A, and an advantageous state in which the number of lotteries of special symbols in one chance mode A is long can be obtained. Therefore, the player can expect the pachinko machine 10 to be initialized, and can play a game with the pachinko machine 10 when the hall is opened. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pachinko machine 10 that has never won a jackpot from being shunned by the players, and to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In the second embodiment, in the normal state, it is configured to periodically shift to the chance mode A, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the gaming state becomes a normal state, when the lottery of special symbols is executed a predetermined first number of times (eg, 500 times), the second number of times the chance mode A is predetermined (eg , 1000 times). After the second number of times has passed, the normal mode may be continued until the next big win. By configuring in this way, when the first number of times (500 times) consecutive failures occur in the normal state, an advantageous state is set over the second number of times, so that a so-called large addiction occurs. It is possible to provide a remedy (provide a so-called ceiling) for the case where it occurs. Therefore, even if the player loses many times in succession in the normal state, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous state is approaching, so that the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. FIG. In the above-described second embodiment, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the big win, the game state is the normal state on the assumption that the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a probability variable state of 100 special symbols after the end of the big win. A disadvantageous normal mode and an advantageous chance mode A are switched according to the number of times of lottery of special symbols executed after becoming.

On the other hand, in the present third embodiment, it has the same structure as the variable winning device 65 of each of the above embodiments, and is configured to provide a small winning variable winning device 65b that is opened during the small winning game. Then, in addition to the case where the special pattern lottery results in a big win, the special pattern lottery results in a small win, and when the ball passes through the V winning prize switch 65e3 in the small winning variable prize winning device 65b, the big prize is started. It is assumed that the pachinko machine 10 (a so-called one-and-two mixed machine) of the specification is used. More specifically, only two types of game states, a time-saving state and a normal state, are provided, and the probability of a small win when the second special symbol lottery is executed is lower than the first special symbol lottery. By increasing the height, the V prize switch 65e3 is easily passed through during the time-saving state (ie, a big hit is likely to occur). In addition, compared to the normal state, when the jackpot is won during the time saving state, the setting ratio of the time saving state after the jackpot ends is set to be higher. In this specification, in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is not set (the normal state is set) after the jackpot won during the time saving state, the normal mode and the chance mode A are switched. there is As a result, even if the advantageous time-saving state ends, the chance mode A is set in the normal state set thereafter, so the chance mode is expected to bring back the big win during the chance mode A. The game can be continued until is completed.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that the game board 13 is provided with a variable winning device 65b for small winning instead of the variable winning device 65. , the second variable prize winning device 650 is provided at the lower left of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front, and the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the content of the RAM 203 provided in the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. This is the point. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Elements that are the same as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 81, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 81, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a small winning variable winning device 65b is arranged on the upper right side of the second ball entrance 640 when viewed from the front. This variable prize winning device 65b is opened when a small win is achieved in a special symbol lottery. The structure of this small winning variable winning device 65b is the same as that of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2 are provided therein. In this embodiment, by passing through the V winning switch 65e3 provided in the special discharge channel 65e2 during the small winning, the big winning is started after the small winning ends. That is, in addition to the case of winning a big win in the lottery of special symbols, a chance of winning a big win is given even when a small win is made, so that the interest of the player can be improved when a small win is made.

A second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the game board 13 at the lower left side of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. This second variable prize winning device 650 opens the second specific prize winning port 650a which is normally closed when the jackpot is won, so that a ball can enter the ball. It is a winning hole that pays out 15 prize balls. That is, in the third embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened instead of the specific winning opening 65a when a big win is achieved. Then, the second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened according to an opening/closing pattern determined according to the type of small win when a small win is achieved. As a result, when the jackpot is won, the left-handed shot can be made aiming at the second specific winning hole 650a, so when the jackpot without the time-saving state is given, the second ball-entering hole can be made during the jackpot. It is possible to suppress the ball from entering 640 (the lottery for the second special symbol is suspended).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), the ROM202 in the third embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM202 in the second embodiment in that a small hit type selection table 202e is added. Although details will be described later, the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, and the variation pattern scenario table 202f are changed from those of the second embodiment.

First, with reference to FIG. 82(b), details of the first winning random number table 202a in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 82(b), the first winning random number table 202a in the present embodiment defines only "0" as a determination value (random value) for determining a special symbol jackpot. Of the 300 possible counter values of the first winning random number counter C1, the counter value (random value) that becomes a big hit is 1, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol lottery is 1/300. As described above, in the third embodiment, only the time-saving state and the normal state are provided as game states, and the jackpot is always drawn with a constant drawing probability (1/300).

Also, in the first winning random number table 202a, "1 to 299" are defined as a determination value (random number) for determining a small winning in the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, it becomes a big hit (1/300) or a small hit (299/300). When the ball enters the small winning prize opening 65c in the small winning and passes through the V winning prize switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharge flow path 65e2, the big winning starts after the small winning ends. In other words, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the lottery result is a direct big win or a small win which is a chance to pass the V prize switch 65e3, so the lottery for the first special symbol is not drawn for a small win. It is advantageous to the player compared to .

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, there is an opening/closing pattern in which the ball is likely to enter the special discharge channel 65e2 when the "small hit E" selected at 5% of the small win is reached. set.

Next, with reference to FIG.82(c), the detail of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b is demonstrated. FIG.82(c) is the figure which showed the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table 202b in the 3rd Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82(c), the first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment includes three types of jackpot types (jackpots G to I) that can be determined when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. , Three kinds of jackpot types (jackpots J to L) that can be started after the jackpot are provided based on passing the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 82(c), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is " The range of 0 to 49” is associated with the “jackpot G”. This "jackpot G" is a jackpot type (time saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and the time saving state is provided 100 times after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the "jackpot G", so when a special symbol lottery results in a big win. The percentage of determining the “jackpot G” is 50% (50/100). In the time-saving state, the lottery for the advantageous second special symbol is likely to be executed.

Also, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 79", and is associated with "big winning H". This "jackpot H" is a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and a normal state is set after the jackpot ends (a time saving state is not given). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the "jackpot H", so when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit. The percentage of determining the “jackpot H” is 30% (30/100). Since the normal state more disadvantageous than the time-saving state is set after the big win, the "jackpot H" is a jackpot type more disadvantageous than the "jackpot G".

"Jack I" is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "jackpot I" is a jackpot type (special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is four and the game state set after the jackpot ends varies according to the game state when the jackpot is won. More specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the "jackpot I" is the normal state, the normal state is set even after the end of the jackpot, and even if the game state at the time of winning the "jackpot I" is the time-saving state. For example, a time saving state of 100 times is set after the end of the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the "jackpot I". The percentage of determining the "jackpot I" is 20% (20/100). In the normal state, when the "jackpot I" is reached, the time-saving state is not given and the number of rounds is the smallest among all the jackpot types, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if it becomes "jackpot I" during the time saving state, although the number of rounds is small, there is a high possibility that it will be a jackpot again during the time saving state, so the time saving state is not given "jackpot H" (and "jackpot K") It is advantageous to the player compared to .

On the other hand, among the three types of jackpot types that can be determined when the ball passes through the V prize switch 65e3 during the small hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". ” is associated. This "jackpot J" is a jackpot type (time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 and a time-saving state is provided 100 times after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) correspond to the "jackpot J". The percentage of "jackpot J" determined when passing is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot J" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because it has the largest number of rounds and is provided with an advantageous time-saving state.

Also, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 79", and is associated with "jackpot K". This "jackpot K" is a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and a normal state is set after the jackpot ends (a time-saving state is not given). Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the "big win K", so the V winning switch 65e3 is pressed while the ball is a small win. The percentage of "jackpot K" determined when passing is 30% (30/100). It has a large number of rounds and is most advantageous in terms of prize balls, but since the normal state is set after the big win, the state after the big win is disadvantageous.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99", and "jackpot L" is associated. This "jackpot L" is a jackpot type (special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is four and the game state set after the jackpot ends varies according to the game state when the jackpot is won. Incidentally, the correspondence relationship between the game state at the time of winning and the game state after the big win is common to the above-mentioned "big win I". Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 20 random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the "big win L", so the V winning switch 65e3 is pressed while the ball is a small win. The percentage of "jackpot L" determined when passing is 20% (20/100). In the normal state, when the "jackpot I" is reached, the time-saving state is not given and the number of rounds is the smallest among all the jackpot types, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if it becomes “jackpot I” during the time saving state, although the number of rounds is small, there is a high possibility that it will become a jackpot again during the time saving state, so compared to “jackpot H” and “jackpot K” where the time saving state is not given to the player's advantage.

It should be noted that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 basically only during the time saving state. That is, it is only when the second special symbol lottery executed based on the right-handed ball entering the second ball entrance 640 results in a small hit. Therefore, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and a big hit is achieved, basically "big hits J, L" are given, and a time saving state is given after the big hit. That is, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the time saving state, the time saving state is entered again at a rate of 70%. Therefore, once it shifts to the time-saving state, the big win and the time-saving state are likely to be repeated, which is extremely advantageous for the player.

Also, in the normal state, basically, the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 to result in a big win. However, it is possible to execute an irregular game method in which the second special symbol lottery is performed by intentionally hitting the right in the normal state, and the ball is expected to pass through the V prize switch 65e3 during the small win. have a nature. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "jackpot L" is reached in the normal state, the time saving state is not given, so that the ratio of giving the time saving state when the jackpot is given is 50% ( The configuration is the same as when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit in a normal state). By constructing in this way, even if the player wins a big hit by hitting to the right, the degree of expectation for giving the time saving state is the same as when hitting to the left, so the advantage of hitting to the right in the normal state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the player hits to the right even in the normal state.

In this embodiment, only the "jackpot L" is configured as a special jackpot that varies whether or not the time saving state is given according to the game state, but the "jackpot J" may also be a special jackpot. That is, when the jackpot is achieved by passing the V winning switch 65e3 in the normal state, the normal state may be set after the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further enhance the effect of suppressing an irregular game method in which the player always hits to the right.

In this way, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state results in a big hit, a time-saving state that is advantageous only in the case of "jackpot G" is given, and "jackpot H" is given. , or in the case of "jackpot I", the normal state is set. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving state is provided when the jackpot is achieved in the normal state is 50%. In the time-saving state, the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed, and in the lottery for the second special symbol, there is a probability of about 1/20 that the ball can easily enter the special discharge channel 65e2. It becomes the set small hit type (small hit E). Therefore, if the ball is hit toward the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right during the time-saving state of 100 times, it is possible to create an extremely advantageous state in which the player will hit the jackpot again with a high probability.

In addition, when a special pattern lottery executed in the time saving state results in a big win, in addition to the "big win G", even when a "big win I" is obtained, the time saving state is given after the big win. That is, when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit during the time saving state, the time saving state is provided at a rate of 70%. That is, in the time saving state, the time saving state is provided at a rate of 70% even if the lottery of the special symbols wins a big win or the V prize switch 65e3 passes the big win. Therefore, once the time-saving state is reached, the big win and the time-saving state are repeated at a high probability (about 70%), which is extremely advantageous for the player.

Next, with reference to Drawing 83 (a), the details of small hit classification selection table 202e in a 3rd embodiment are explained. In the small hit type selection table 202e in the third embodiment, the small hit type is defined in association with each range of the value of the small hit type counter C5.

More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 94", "small hit D" is associated. This "small hit D" is the same as the first round of "big wins C, D" in the first embodiment (see the middle of FIG. 7), the small win winning opening 65c is short (0.2 seconds) Since the opening/closing pattern is set so that it is only opened, it is a disadvantageous small winning type in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the small winning prize opening 65c (the ball is difficult to pass through the V winning prize switch 65e3). Since the flow path solenoid 65k also performs the same operation as the first round of the big win in the first embodiment (see the upper part of FIG. 7), the ball is released during the opening period of 0.2 seconds. If the ball can be made to enter the special discharge channel 65e2, the ball can be made to flow down. That is, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e, a big win is started after a small win. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, the random number (counter value) corresponding to the "small hit D" is 95, so the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. When it becomes, the ratio of "small hit D" is 95% (95/100).

"Small hit E" is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "95 to 99". This "small hit E" is the same as the first round (see the lower part of FIG. 7) such as the "big win A" in the first embodiment, the opening period of the small win winning opening 65c and the turning on of the flow path solenoid 65k. Since an open/close pattern matching the period (opening period of the special discharge channel 65e2) is set, the ball can easily enter the small winning prize opening 65c (the ball can easily pass through the V winning prize switch 65e3). It is a hit type. When the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e during the small win, the big win is started after the small win. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 5 random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the "small hit E", so the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. In this case, the percentage of "small win E" is 5% (5/100).

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, it becomes a small hit with a probability of 299/300. Then, 5% (1/20) of the small hit results in a "small hit E" in which the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, if you hit the right hand during the time saving state 100 times, there is a probability of 99% or more that you will be a big hit in the lottery of special symbols, or at least one time within the time saving number of times "small hit E" (No. 2 The probability of 100 consecutive “small hits D” in the lottery of special symbols is 0.42%). Therefore, when it comes to the time saving state, it becomes a big hit with a probability of 99% or more. ``Big win K'' (distribution 30%), and the big win and time saving state are repeated until the normal state is set after the big win. That is, it becomes an extremely advantageous state in which the big win and the time saving state are repeated with a probability of about 70%.

Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 83(b). FIG. 83(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the third embodiment. This variation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines variation pattern scenarios for each of the previous jackpot types, like the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the second embodiment.

First, the variation pattern scenario that is set when the previous big win type is the big win K (16-round normal big win) will be described. As described above, this big win K is one of the big win types started after the small win is completed based on the ball passing through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small win, and the normal state is set after the big win. . As described above, it is basically during the time saving state that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and becomes a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot K is a jackpot that serves as an opportunity to return to the disadvantageous normal state after the advantageous state in which the jackpot and the time-saving state are likely to be repeated.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), when the jackpot type is the jackpot K, among the variation pattern scenarios set at the end of the jackpot K, the number of special symbol lotteries is in the range of 1 to 25 times, A normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15(b)) is associated as the variation pattern table. As a result, immediately after the big win K is finished, a disadvantageous state (normal mode) is set in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed.

In addition, a chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16(b)) is associated as a variation pattern table in the range of 26 to 35 special symbol lotteries. Therefore, if the lottery of special symbols is lost continuously over 25 times of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the big hit K, the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed over 10 times of lotteries of special symbols. (the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol) (chance mode A is entered). Therefore, while the chance mode A is set, it becomes easier to win a small hit by playing a game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right. Therefore, in the chance mode A, there is a high possibility that the ball will pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during a small win, which is an advantageous state in which a big win is likely to occur. In addition, as described above, the small win E in which the open/close pattern that allows the ball to easily flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is selected at a rate of 5% (1/20) when the small win occurs. Therefore, in the chance mode A, just by continuing to hit to the right, there is a probability of about 1/20 that a big win will occur. The ratio of the maximum 10 special symbol lotteries executed in the chance mode A to all the small winning D (small winning type in which the ball is difficult to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2) is the special symbol lottery and the small winning. It becomes the 10th power of the value obtained by multiplying the probability of becoming D (1/300) by the probability of becoming a small hit D (19/20) (about 57.9%). Therefore, the ratio (expectation) of winning a big win in one chance mode A is about 42.1%, so when the chance mode A is shifted to, the player's expectation for the big win should be increased. can be done. Since the chance mode A is a kind of normal state as a game state, when a special big win (big wins I, L) occurs, the normal state is set after the big win. That is, although the degree of expectation for a big win is high, the degree of expectation for giving the time-saving state when a big win is achieved is 50%, which is the same as in the normal mode.

After the number of lotteries for special symbols is 31, normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15(b)) is associated as a variation pattern table. Therefore, after the chance mode A ends, the game goes into the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player, until a big win is achieved.

In this way, when the big win K, which is the main trigger for ending the time-saving state that is extremely advantageous to the player, is reached, the special pattern lottery is executed 25 times after the big win K, and the expectation of the big win is high. It is set as the structure which transfers to the chance mode A. By constructing in this way, even if the time-saving state advantageous to the player ends and shifts to the normal state, the chance mode A to be set thereafter becomes a big hit, and the time-saving state is set again. In anticipation of this, the game can be continued at least until the chance mode A ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately after the advantageous time-saving state ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is other than the jackpot K (jackets G to J, L) and the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot In the case of ), the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern is in the range of 1 to 100 times (that is, the number of times of lottery that becomes the time saving state of the normal pattern), the table 202d2 for consecutive houses / chance B as a fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 16(a)) are associated. As a result, during the time saving state, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter than in the normal mode, and the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, when the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 100 times, the state returns from the time saving state to the normal state. ) reference) are associated. As a result, after the shift to the normal state, it becomes extremely difficult to execute the lottery for the second special pattern (the fluctuation time becomes a very long fluctuation of 10 minutes), so the lottery for the first special pattern is executed by hitting left. be able to.

When the jackpot type is other than jackpot K (jackets G to J, L), and when the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot (the time-saving state is not given) (when it becomes jackpot H, or , when a special jackpot occurs during a normal state), the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15(b)) is associated as a variation pattern table regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. Therefore, since it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol after the big hit regardless of the number of times of lottery of the special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed by hitting to the left.

In this way, in the third embodiment, when the game shifts to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player due to the jackpot K in the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, a special pattern lottery for a specific number of times is executed, a transition is made to the chance mode A, which is relatively advantageous to the player. In this chance mode A, the lottery for the second special symbol is more likely to be executed, and it becomes easier to win a small win and cause the ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2, so the degree of expectation for a big win is increased. Therefore, even when the advantageous time-saving state ends, the player can be made to think to continue the game at least until the chance mode A ends. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's desire to play when the most advantageous state ends.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the special jackpot is achieved in the chance mode A, the game state after the special jackpot is set to the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the special jackpot is obtained in the normal mode, the normal state is set, and when the special jackpot is obtained in the time-saving state and the chance mode A, the time-saving state may be set. By constructing in this way, the degree of expectation in the time saving state when the chance mode A is a big win can be made equal to the big win in the time saving state, so that the player's expectation for the chance mode A is further enhanced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's desire to play.

In the third embodiment, when a small win is obtained in the lottery for the second special symbol, the ball is more likely to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 5% regardless of the game state or mode. It is not limited to this. For example, in the normal mode, an opening/closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass the V prize switch 65e when a small win is made may be easily set. More specifically, for example, when a small hit occurs in the normal mode, only the small hit D may be determined, or when the small hit E is obtained without changing the sorting of the small hit types. The opening/closing pattern of the small winning prize opening 65c may be made common to the small winning prize D in the normal mode (an opening/closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the V winning prize switch 65e3). With this configuration, it is difficult to pass the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 even if the player always hits to the right during the normal mode, so the advantage of hitting to the right during the normal mode is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right during the normal mode.

In the third embodiment, after the jackpot K is completed, when the number of special symbol lotteries reaches the range of 26 to 35 times, the chance mode A is set. The number of lotteries for which mode A continues may be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, the chance mode A may be set in the range of 91 to 100 special symbol lotteries. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make players think to continue the game from the end of the big win K until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times. Further, the chance mode A may be set when the number of lotteries for special symbols is in the range of 26 to 30 times. By reducing the number of times of the chance mode A, the chance mode A after the time-saving state ends can be a big win and the ratio of pulling back the time-saving state can be reduced, so that the gambling property of the Pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of lotteries in which the chance mode A is obtained is increased. If the number of lotteries in the chance mode A increases, the expectation of a big win in the chance mode A also increases, so when the time saving state ends, the game can be continued until the chance mode A ends more reliably. can.

In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the game shifts to the chance mode A only after the big win K is completed. For example, it may be configured to shift to the chance mode A even when the jackpot H is reached. By configuring in this way, a normal jackpot (jackpot H, K) is obtained in the time saving state, and when the normal state is set, a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (for example, 25 times) is executed in a chance mode. Since the mode shifts to A, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's willingness to play when the time saving state ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this case, when the jackpot H is obtained in the normal state, the chance mode A is provided only when the jackpot H is obtained in the time saving state without setting the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is provided. It may be configured to set a variation pattern scenario. Thus, only the normal state after the time saving state is finished can be made advantageous without changing the degree of advantage of the normal state other than the normal state set after the time saving state is finished.

In the third embodiment, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot K, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set. The scenario set according to the gaming state or mode at the time of winning may be varied. More specifically, for example, when a jackpot K is won by hitting to the right in the normal mode, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to regardless of the number of times, and a big win is made in the time-saving state or in the chance mode A. When it becomes K, it is good also as a structure which sets the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the advantage of hitting to the right during the normal mode, so that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right all the time.

In this embodiment, only one lottery number of times to shift to the chance mode A after the big hit is provided, but it is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the lottery number of times to shift to the chance mode A is different. A scenario may be provided. More specifically, a plurality of normal jackpots (jackets K1, K2, . It is also possible to set a variation pattern scenario in which the number of lotteries for shifting to mode A is different. More specifically, for example, the number of lotteries to shift to the chance mode A may be changed by 25 times, such as 25 times for the jackpot K1, 50 times for the jackpot K2, and 75 times for the jackpot K3. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify when to shift to the chance mode A.

In this embodiment, when a variation pattern scenario is set in which the chance mode A is set after the big hit, the chance mode A is set only once, but the configuration is such that the chance mode A is set multiple times. good too. Specifically, for example, after the jackpot K is completed, the chance mode A may be set in the range of 26 times to 35 times, the range of 101 times to 105 times, and the range of 1000 times to 2000 times. good. Thus, even after the first chance mode A ends without winning the jackpot, the player can be encouraged to continue the game until the second chance mode A is reached. In addition, even when the player becomes hooked, the player can be encouraged to continue the game until the third chance mode A is reached. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment has a variable probability counter 203g, a variable probability setting flag 203h, a variable probability passage counter 203i, and a variable probability effective flag, in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 77). 203o and probability variable effective timer 203p are deleted, and jackpot start flag 203ad, V passage counter 203ae, V passage effective flag 203af, V passage effective timer 203ag, winning state storage area 203ah are added.

The jackpot start flag 203ad is a flag indicating whether a jackpot is started after a small hit. If this jackpot start flag 203ad is ON, the start of the jackpot is set at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 87), and if it is OFF, the small hit is finished as it is. This big win start flag 203ad is set to ON when a ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during a small win. Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S2510 in FIG. 87).

The V passing counter 203ae, the V passing valid flag 203af, and the V passing valid timer 203ag respectively correspond to the probability variable passing counter 203i, the probability variable valid flag 203o, and the probability variable valid timer 203p in the second embodiment. These contents are the same as the probability variable passing counter 203i, the probability variable effective flag 203o, and the probability variable effective timer 203p in the second embodiment, except that they are referred to or updated during the small hit. That is, the number of balls passing through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small winning is counted by the V passing counter 203ae. Also, the V passing valid flag 203af is used to determine whether or not the passing of the V winning switch 65e3 is valid. Further, the V passage valid timer 203ag sets the period during which the passage of the V winning switch 65e3 is valid after the passage solenoid 203k is set to OFF.

The winning state storage area 203ah is a storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving state. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time saving state (if the value of the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more), the information indicating the time saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203ah. 01H" is stored. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203r is 0), "00H" is stored as information indicating the normal state in the winning state storage area 203ah. be done. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203ah is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the end of the special big win (see S2223 in FIG. 86). That is, when "01H" indicating that the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state is stored in the winning storage area 203ah at the end of the special jackpot, the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends, If "00H" indicating that the game state at the time of winning is the normal state is stored in the winning storage area 203ah, the normal state is set as the game state after the end of the big win.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG. First, FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 4 (S2021) executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

The jackpot control process 4 in the third embodiment is a process for opening or closing the second specific prize winning opening 650a for each jackpot round. Of this jackpot control process 4 (S2021), in each process of S2101, S2102, S2104 to S2111, S2101, S2102, S2104 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) The same processing as each processing of S2111 is executed. On the other hand, in the jackpot control process 4 (S2021), the processes of S2103, S2112, and S2113 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) are deleted. These processes are processes for executing the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in the small winning variable winning device 65b, the monitoring of the V winning switch 65e3, and the like. This is because it is an unnecessary process in the third embodiment.

Also, in the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 85) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing in the process of S2111 (S2111: Yes), the jackpot end process in the second embodiment 3 (see FIG. 80), a jackpot ending process 4 is executed (S2131), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot ending process 4 (S2131) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 4 (S2131). This jackpot end process 4 (S2131) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, like the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment.

Of the jackpot end processing 4 (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment, S2204 and S2211 to S2213 of the jackpot end processing 3 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 80) S2204 and S2211 to The same processing as each processing of S2213 is executed.

In addition, when the jackpot end processing 4 (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment is started, first, it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is a time-saving jackpot (that is, jackpot G, J) (S2221), If it is a time-saving jackpot (S2221: Yes), by shifting the process to S2204 and setting 101 to the value of the time-saving medium counter 203r, after the jackpot, the time-saving until just before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed. It is set so that a state is given (S2204). On the other hand, in the processing of S2221, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving jackpot (S2221: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a special jackpot (jackets I, L) (S2222). In the process of S2222, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a special jackpot (S2222: Yes), information corresponding to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is read out from the winning state storage area 203ah (S2223), It is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning was the time saving state (S2224).

In the process of S2224, when it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is the time saving state (S2224: Yes), the process proceeds to S2204 in order to set the game state after the big hit to the time saving state. On the other hand, in the process of S2224, if it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is not the time saving state (that is, the normal state) (S2224: No), the process proceeds to S2225 without setting the time saving state. . Also, in the processing of S2222, even if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not a special jackpot (S2222: No), the current jackpot is a normal jackpot and there is no need to set the value of the time-saving medium counter. to S2225.

In the process of S2225, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state corresponding to the value of the time saving counter 203r is set (S2225), and the jackpot flag 203v is set to OFF (S2226), The process proceeds to S2211. By executing this jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 86), it is possible to accurately set the time saving state according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the small winning control process 4 (S2022) executed in place of the small winning control process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) will be described. . FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this small hit control process 4 (S2022).

Of this small hit control process 4 (see FIG. 87), in each process of S2501 to S2510, each of S2501 to S2510 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) The same processing as the processing is executed.

In addition, in the small hit control processing 4 (see FIG. 87) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit in the processing of S2509 (S2509: Yes), the big hit start flag 203ad is turned on. It is determined whether there is (S2511), and if it is determined that it is on (S2511: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2512). At the time of this setting, information corresponding to the game state at the time of winning is stored in the winning state storage area 203ah based on the value of the time saving counter 203r. Then, the value of the time saving counter 203r is reset to 0 (S2513), and the process proceeds to S2510.

On the other hand, in the process of S2511, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203ad is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2511: No), the processes of S2512 and S2513 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2510. .

Also, in the small hit control process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit in the process of S2509 (S2509: No), the winning process (S2514) and the abnormal process (S2515) is executed respectively. Each of these processes is the same as the winning process (see FIG. 49) and the abnormality process (see FIG. 50) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). When the process is executed (S2514), it is monitored whether or not it is within the effective period and whether or not the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3. , the jackpot start flag 203ad is set to ON. As a result, the state of the big win start flag 203ad can be referenced at the end of the small win, and the start of the big win can be set only when it is ON.

In addition, in the abnormality process (S2515), the number of balls entering the small winning prize opening 65c and the number of balls discharged to the outside through the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e3. are compared to determine whether or not all the balls entered into the variable winning device 65b for small wins have been discharged normally, and an error is reported when the number of balls entering and the number of balls discharged do not match. be done. As a result, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs inside the small winning variable prize winning device 65b, the problem can be promptly reported to the hall clerk or the like.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is based on the premise that the pachinko machine 10 is provided with only two types of game states: the normal state, which is disadvantageous, and the time-saving state, which is advantageous. In the third embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot K is obtained in an advantageous time-saving state and the transition to a disadvantageous normal state is performed, the first number of special symbol lotteries (25 times) are executed. , the normal mode is changed to the comparatively advantageous chance mode A. This chance mode A is continued over the second number of special symbol lotteries (10 times), and if the big win is not achieved while the second number of special symbol lotteries are executed, it is restarted. It is configured to shift to a disadvantageous normal mode. Thus, even when the advantageous time-saving state shifts to the disadvantageous normal state, the game can be continued in anticipation of the chance mode A that shifts after that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining when the advantageous time-saving state ends, and to maintain the player's desire to play at least until the chance mode A ends.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the special jackpot is achieved in the chance mode A, the game state after the special jackpot is set to the normal state, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the special jackpot is obtained in the normal mode, the normal state is set, and when the special jackpot is obtained in the time saving state and the chance mode A, the time saving state may be set. By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation in the time saving state when the chance mode A is a big win can be made equal to the big win in the time saving state, so that the player's expectation for the chance mode A is further enhanced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's desire to play.

In the third embodiment, when a small win is obtained in the lottery for the second special symbol, the ball is more likely to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 5% regardless of the game state or mode. It is not limited to this. For example, in the normal mode, an opening/closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass the V prize switch 65e when a small win is made may be easily set. More specifically, for example, when a small hit occurs in the normal mode, only the small hit D may be determined, or when the small hit E is obtained without changing the sorting of the small hit types. The opening/closing pattern of the small winning prize opening 65c may be made common to the small winning prize D in the normal mode (an opening/closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the V winning prize switch 65e3). With this configuration, it is difficult to pass the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 even if the player always hits to the right during the normal mode, so the advantage of hitting to the right during the normal mode is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right during the normal mode.

In the third embodiment, after the end of the jackpot K, when the number of special symbol lotteries is in the range of 26 to 35 times, the chance mode A is set. The number of lotteries for which mode A continues may be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, the chance mode A may be set when the number of special symbol lotteries is in the range of 91 to 100 times. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make players think to continue the game from the end of the big win K until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times. Further, the chance mode A may be set when the number of lotteries for special symbols is in the range of 26 to 30 times. By reducing the number of times of the chance mode A, the chance mode A after the time-saving state ends can be a big hit and the ratio of pulling back the time-saving state can be reduced, so that the gambling property of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of lotteries in which the chance mode A is obtained is increased. If the number of lotteries in the chance mode A increases, the expectation of a big win in the chance mode A also increases, so when the time saving state ends, the game can be continued until the chance mode A ends more reliably. can.

In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the game shifts to the chance mode A only after the big win K is completed. For example, it may be configured to shift to the chance mode A even when the jackpot H is reached. By configuring in this way, a normal jackpot (jackpot H, K) is obtained in the time saving state, and when the normal state is set, a special pattern lottery for a specific number of times (for example, 25 times) is executed in a chance mode. Since the mode shifts to A, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's desire to play when the time saving state ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this case, when the jackpot H is obtained in the normal state, the chance mode A is provided only when the jackpot H is obtained in the time saving state without setting the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is provided. It may be configured to set a variation pattern scenario. Thereby, only the normal state after the time saving state is finished can be made advantageous without changing the degree of advantage of the normal state other than the normal state set after the time saving state is finished.

In the third embodiment, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot K, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set. The scenario set according to the gaming state or mode at the time of winning may be varied. More specifically, for example, when a jackpot K is won by hitting to the right in the normal mode, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to regardless of the number of times, and a big win is made in the time-saving state or in the chance mode A. When it becomes K, it is good also as a structure which sets the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the advantage of hitting to the right during the normal mode, so that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right all the time.

In this embodiment, only one lottery number of times to shift to the chance mode A after the big hit is provided, but it is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the lottery number of times to shift to the chance mode A is different. A scenario may be provided. More specifically, a plurality of normal jackpots (jackets K1, K2, . It is also possible to set a variation pattern scenario in which the number of lotteries for shifting to mode A is different. More specifically, for example, the number of lotteries to shift to the chance mode A may be changed by 25 times, such as 25 times for the jackpot K1, 50 times for the jackpot K2, and 75 times for the jackpot K3. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify when to shift to the chance mode A.

In this embodiment, when a variation pattern scenario is set in which the chance mode A is set after the big hit, the chance mode A is set only once, but the configuration is such that the chance mode A is set multiple times. good too. Specifically, for example, similarly to the second embodiment, the state (normal mode) in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the normal table 202d1, and the variation pattern is determined with reference to the chance A table 202d3 The configuration may be such that the state (chance mode A) is periodically switched. More specifically, for example, as a variation pattern scenario set at the end of the jackpot K, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the range of the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the variation number counter 203ab) from 1 to 25 times. Then, the chance A table 202d3 is associated with the range of 26 times to 35 times, and the normal table 202d1 is associated with the range of 36 times to 60 times. The chance A table 202d3 and the normal table 202d1 for 25 special symbol lotteries may be repeated. In addition, as another example of shifting to the chance mode A multiple times, for example, after the jackpot K ends, in the range of 26 times to 35 times, the range of 101 times to 105 times, and the range of 1000 times to 2000 times A configuration in which the chance mode A is set may be adopted. Thus, even after the first chance mode A ends without winning the jackpot, the player can be encouraged to continue the game until the second chance mode A is reached. In addition, even when the player is hooked into the game, the player can be encouraged to continue the game until the third chance mode A is reached. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 102. FIG. In the above-described second embodiment, the first ball entry hole 64 into which the ball is likely to enter by left-handed hitting and the second ball entry hole 640 into which the ball is likely to enter by right-handed hitting are provided. The person who wins big in the lottery for the second special pattern executed based on the ball entering the opening 640 wins the big prize in the lottery for the first special pattern based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. It was configured to be more advantageous to the player than to become (become more likely to be given a variable probability state after a big hit). In a normal state, a disadvantageous normal mode in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed and an advantageous chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed are switched according to the number of lotteries of the special symbol. was.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are more likely to be executed by hitting to the left, and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed by hitting to the right. The board surface is configured so that it is easy to be played. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of control specifications is premised for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to fall from the variable probability state to the normal state each time the lottery condition for the special symbols is satisfied in the variable probability state of the special symbols. Based on these premises, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage (ease of execution of the lottery of the second special symbol) is adjusted according to the timing (the number of lotteries) of falling from the variable probability state to the normal state. It is configured to be different. More specifically, by setting a scenario referring to a variation pattern table in which the first special symbol lottery is difficult to execute from the transition to the variable probability state until the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times, the specified It is configured to form an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed even if the game is returned to the left handed state when the player falls to the normal state before the lottery of the special symbol of the number of times is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide relief from the case where the variable probability state falls to the normal state at an early stage, so that the player's motivation for playing the game can be maintained.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that a distribution unit 660 is provided instead of the first ball entrance 64 in the game board 13. , the content of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the content of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the main controller 110 The point is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Elements that are the same as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 88, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 88, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting unit 660 is arranged at the position (below the variable display unit 80) where the first entrance 640 was arranged in the second embodiment. The difference is that Although the details will be described later, the sorting unit 660 is configured so that a ball can enter through a passage opening provided in the upper portion thereof. Inside the sorting unit 660, there is a first ball entrance 64 in which a lottery for a first special symbol is executed when a ball enters, and a lottery for a second special symbol is executed when a ball enters. A second central ball entrance 640c is provided, and a ball entered into the sorting unit 660 through the passage is sorted to one of these entrances. Therefore, by hitting the ball aiming at the sorting unit 660 by hitting to the left, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed.

Now, with reference to FIG. 89, the configuration of distribution unit 660 will be described. 89(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 660. FIG. In fact, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral pattern is attached to the surface and colored so that the inside cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through. It is configured so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), the upper part of the sorting unit 660 is provided with a passage through which a ball can enter. A mold entry sensor 660a is located. A distributing member 900 for distributing balls to the first ball entrance 64 or the central second ball entrance 640c is provided below the passage opening. A first ball entrance 64 is provided in the lower left direction of the distribution member 900 when viewed from the front, and a second central ball entrance 640c is disposed in the lower left direction of the distribution member 900 when viewed from the front. Balls that have passed through the passage openings are alternately distributed to the first ball entrance opening 64 and the central second ball entrance opening 640c by the distribution member 900 .

The sorting member 900 is configured to be able to receive a ball entering the sorting unit 660 with the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When a ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the weight of the ball causes the distribution member 900 as a whole to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is inclined downward to the left (see FIG. 89(b)). The ball falls toward the ball opening 64a (the ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64). Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front. there is

On the other hand, on the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 660, the back side (passage opening) of the position where the magnets 900b are arranged when the sorting member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. ), the base-side magnet 901 is arranged. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the sorting member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also a bar-shaped magnet, similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. At a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b comes directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage port), the base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the magnets are repulsive and do not stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. , left or right.

As a result, when the sorting member 900 reaches a position where the magnet 900b is on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, so that the sorting member 900 moves left or right. It rotates, and one of the storage section 900a and the storage section 900b faces the side of receiving incoming balls in the sorting unit 660 (the upper side of the gaming machine). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the entering ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the storage portion 900a and the storage portion 900b and causing ball clogging.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, the accommodation portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, guiding the ball to the first ball entrance 64a, and then distributing the member. It is possible to prevent the right rotation of 900 (accommodating portion 900a facing upward). As a result, after the ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64, the receiving portion 900c faces upward, and the receiving portion 900c receives the ball that enters the sorting unit 660 next. When the receiving portion 90c receives the ball, the distribution member 900 rotates clockwise by about 90 degrees due to the weight of the received ball, and the receiving portion 900c is tilted in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball falls from the housing portion 900c and enters the second central ball entrance 640c (the ball is guided to the second central ball entrance 640c). In this way, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the ball entering the sorting unit 660 to the first ball entrance 64 and the central second ball entrance 640c. The balls can be evenly distributed to the central second ball entrance 640c to win a prize. Thereby, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in parallel.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. FIG. First, FIG. 90(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90(a), the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the second embodiment in that a falling lottery table 202g is added. Also, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern scenario table 202f are changed from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment.

The falling lottery table 202g is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the variable probability state to the normal state in the variable probability state of the special symbol (falling lottery). counter value) is stored. In the probability variable state of the special symbols, every time the lottery of the special symbols is executed, the falling lottery table 202g is referred to and it is determined whether or not to fall to the normal state. The details of the drop lottery table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 93(a).

Next, with reference to FIG.90(b), the detail of the 1st hit classification|category selection table 202b in the 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. This first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which jackpot types are defined in association with each possible value of the first hit type counter C2, similarly to the second embodiment.

Four jackpot types are provided in the fourth embodiment. That is, "jackpot M" and "jackpot N" that can be determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, and "jackpot O" that can be determined when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, A "jackpot P" is provided.

As shown in FIG. 90(b), when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 69", the jackpot type is "jackpot M" is determined. This "jackpot M" has 16 rounds, and as the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (passes through the V prize switch 65e3). It is a jackpot type in which a difficult opening and closing pattern (see the middle of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the largest among the jackpots, it is advantageous to the player in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but since the possibility of setting a variable probability state after the jackpot is low, it is disadvantageous as a game state after the jackpot. Become.

Further, if the value of the first win type counter C2 is within the range of "70 to 99", "jackpot N" is determined as the jackpot type. This "jackpot N" has four rounds, and as the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball may flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (pass through the V prize switch 65e3). It is a jackpot type in which a difficult opening and closing pattern (see the middle of FIG. 7) is set. The “jackpot N” is the most disadvantageous jackpot type because the number of rounds is the smallest and the possibility of setting a variable probability state after the jackpot is low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90(b), when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 69", the jackpot type A "jackpot O" is determined. This "jackpot O" has 16 rounds, and as the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (passes through the V prize switch 65e3). It is a jackpot type in which an easy opening and closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set. The “jackpot O” is the most advantageous jackpot type because it has the largest number of rounds and is likely to be set to a variable probability state after the jackpot.

Further, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is within the range of "70 to 99", "jackpot P" is determined as the jackpot type. This "jackpot P" has 4 rounds, and as the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball may flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (pass through the V winning switch 65e3). It is a jackpot type in which an easy opening and closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set. Although the number of rounds is the smallest, there is a high possibility that the variable state will be set after the jackpot, so the "jackpot P" is a game after the jackpot rather than the jackpot (jackpot M, N) determined by the first special symbol lottery. status is favorable.

Thus, in the fourth embodiment, only the jackpot type is determined in which a variable probability state is unlikely to be provided (the ball is difficult to pass through the V winning prize switch 65e3) when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured. On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big hit, only the big hit type is determined so that the variable probability state is likely to be given (the ball easily passes through the V winning prize switch 65e3). As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball is configured to easily enter the distribution member 900 when the ball is hit left-handed. The distributing member 900 alternately distributes balls to the first ball entrance 64 and the central second ball entrance 640c each time a ball enters. Therefore, even in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, the lottery for the first special symbol that is disadvantageous and the lottery for the second special symbol that is advantageous can be carried out almost equally by hitting to the left. Therefore, the player can play the game in the normal state in anticipation of a big win in the lottery of the advantageous second special symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90(c), details of the second winning random number table 202c in the fourth embodiment will be described. In each of the above embodiments (first to third embodiments), the normal state of the normal design and the time saving state of the normal design, the probability of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design, and the normal design hit. In this configuration, there is not much difference in the open period of the electric accessory 640a in each case. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal design, compared to the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal design, the probability of winning the normal design is greatly reduced. ing.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90(c), only "0" is defined as the value of the second winning random number counter C4 that normally wins the design in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal design. ing. On the other hand, the same random number value (counter value) as in each of the above-described embodiments is defined for the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbols, the probability of winning the normal symbols is 1/240, so even if the player hits to the right in the normal state, the normal symbols rarely win.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal design in the normal state of the normal design is 30 seconds (3 seconds during the time saving state), and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a when the normal design is hit. is 0.2 seconds x 1 time (1 second x 2 times during time saving state). Therefore, in the normal state (low-probability state) of the normal design, it takes time from passing through the through gate 67 until the lottery result of the normal design comes out, the probability of winning the normal design becomes extremely low, and the normal An open period is set in which it is difficult to enter the ball during the open period of the electric accessory 640a even if the symbol is hit. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to increase the deterrent effect against the irregular game method in which the player always hits to the right in anticipation of the fact that the lottery for the second special symbol will be executed and that the player will win a big prize.

Next, referring to FIG. 91(a), the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 91(a), two types of variation pattern tables are provided in the variation pattern table 202d of the fourth embodiment. Specifically, a normal table 202d1 and a table 202d4 for probability variation are provided.

The normal table 202d1 is referred to mainly when determining the variation pattern in the normal state, as in each of the above embodiments. In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving state and even a part of the variable probability state are referred to when the normal table 202d1 determines the variation pattern.

The variable probability granting table 202d4 indicates that when the game state after the big win changes to the variable probability state due to the ball passing through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big win, a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) ) is a table referred to throughout the lottery of special symbols. Details will be described later, but during the period (within 20 times after the end of the jackpot or within 50 times) during which the table 202d4 is referred to when the probability variation is given, the lottery of the first special symbol will be a long variation, so hit left. Then, while the first special symbol is fluctuating long, the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed a plurality of times. That is, when hitting left, it is possible to bias the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous. It should be noted that, during the variable probability state, only the lottery for the second special symbol that is more advantageous for hitting to the right can be performed, so there is no merit in executing the hitting to the left. Therefore, the benefit of this table 202d4 for giving variable probability is that the variable probability state falls to the normal state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 even if the ball is hit rightward within a specific number of times. This is the case when

Next, with reference to FIG. 91(b), details of the normal table 202d1 in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 91(b), in the present embodiment, the same variation pattern is used for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery if the values of the stop type and the variation type counter CS1 are the same. is selected. In addition, the correspondence between the value (counter value) of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern is the same as the correspondence for the first special symbol in the normal table 202d1 in each of the above embodiments (see FIG. 15(b)). Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92(a), the details of the table 202d4 for when probability variation is given will be described. As shown in FIG. 92(a), the lottery for the first special symbol is associated with a long variation (120 seconds) regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence as the correspondence defined in the normal table 202d1 described above is defined. Therefore, after the big hit, the variable probability state is granted, and the period during which the table 202d4 for the probability variable grant is referred to (the period until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times or 50 times) falls to the normal state, and the left When returning to hitting, the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer. Therefore, by continuing to hit left, the lottery of the second special pattern can be performed a plurality of times while the first special pattern is fluctuating to long, so the second special pattern is advantageous in the lottery of the special pattern. can be overemphasized in the lottery of Therefore, when the probability variable state falls to the normal state at an early stage, a relatively advantageous state can be obtained, so that the player's motivation for playing the game after falling to the normal state decreases. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

Next, the variation pattern scenario table 202f in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92(b). This fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines a fluctuation pattern scenario for each jackpot type, like the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), when the jackpot M, O (16 round jackpot) is given, and the probability variable state is given after the jackpot (when the ball passes through the V prize switch 65e3 during the jackpot), the variable As a pattern scenario, the number of lotteries of special symbols is associated with a table 202d4 for variable probability granting in a range of 1 to 20 times. Also, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the 21st and subsequent times. Therefore, when it becomes a big hit M, O, the ball can be passed through the V winning prize switch 65e3, and when it falls from the variable probability state to the normal state within 20 times, the first special symbol is hit left. Only the fluctuation of is the long fluctuation (120 seconds). Therefore, during the long variation of the first special symbol, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed multiple times, so early (after the probability variation state is set It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered even if the lottery of the special symbols falls to the normal state within 20 times. In addition, when falling to the normal state after exceeding 20 times, since the normal table 202d1 is referred to, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed almost half and half.

Also, as shown in FIG. 92(b), when the jackpots N and P (4 round jackpots) are given, and the variable probability state is given after the jackpot (when the ball passes through the V prize switch 65e3 during the jackpot) , As a variation pattern scenario, the number of lotteries of special symbols is associated with a table 202d4 for probability variation granting in the range of 1 to 50 times. Also, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the 51st and subsequent times. Therefore, when it becomes a big hit N, P, the ball can be passed through the V winning prize switch 65e3, and when it falls from the variable probability state to the normal state within 50 times, the first special symbol is hit left. is the long variation (120 seconds). Therefore, during the long variation of the first special symbol, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed multiple times, so early (after the probability variation state is set It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered even if the lottery of the special symbols falls to the normal state within 20 times. In addition, when the variable probability state occurs after the 4-round jackpot, the number of lotteries in which the table 202d4 for the variable probability grant is referred to is increased in comparison with the 16-round jackpot, thereby relieving the disadvantageous jackpot on the prize sphere. can be achieved. In addition, when falling to the normal state after exceeding 50 times, since the normal table 202d1 is referred to, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed approximately half and half.

Also, as shown in FIG. 92(b), if the probability variable state is not given after the big hit (if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big hit), the number of special symbol lotteries is determined as a variation pattern scenario. , the normal table 202d1 is associated. Therefore, the disadvantageous state in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed half and half continues at least until the next big win.

Thus, in the variation pattern scenario of the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state after the big hit becomes the variable probability state, over the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times), when the variable probability is given 202d4 is referred to. When this probability variation grant time table 202d4 is referred to, long variation (120 seconds) is selected when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, if you fall from the variable probability state to the normal state within a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) and return from right-handed to left-handed, multiple times during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the second special symbol A lottery can be run. That is, from the end of the big win until the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times), the second special symbol lottery is executed more often than the first special symbol lottery. easily advantageous situation. Therefore, even if the variable probability state falls to the normal state early (within a specific number of times) after the big win, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

Next, details of the drop lottery table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 93(a). As described above, the fall lottery table 202g stores random numbers (counter values) that are determined as falls in the fall lottery.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the special symbol probability state (high probability state), two of "100, 101" as the determination value corresponding to the fall to the normal state (special symbol low probability state) A random number (counter value) is defined. In the probability variable state of the special symbols, when executing the special symbol lottery, the value of the fall lottery counter (not shown) is compared with the random number (counter value) corresponding to the fall defined in the fall lottery table 202g. , falls to the normal state if the values match. The falling lottery counter (not shown) is a loop counter that is periodically updated within the range of "0 to 299" (for example, each time the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed). Of the 300 possible random numbers (counter values) of the drop lottery counter, two random numbers determined as a fall are specified, so the probability of being determined as a fall in one drop lottery is 1/150. is. It should be noted that the random number (the value of the first per random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the variable probability state is four of "1 to 4" (see FIG. 13 (b)), and becomes a big hit during the variable probability state Since the probability is 1/75, it is set so that the probability of winning a big hit is higher than the probability of being determined to fall in the falling lottery during the variable probability state. Therefore, once the state is shifted to the variable probability state, the player can expect to win a large number of times before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in the game during the variable probability state can be improved. can.

Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93(b). FIG. 93(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 93(b), the RAM203 of the fourth embodiment has the probability variation counter 203g deleted from the configuration of the RAM203 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 77), and the special figure 1 variation The difference is that the stop flag 203ai, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj, and the probability change flag 203ak are added.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is a flag indicating that the execution of the second special symbol jackpot is started while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When this special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Temporary stop refers to a display mode in which the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the disengagement is stopped as a temporary stop symbol, and each third symbol is displayed in a vibrating appearance without being completely stopped and displayed. . Thus, when the second special symbol jackpot is started, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on to temporarily stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, so that the first special symbol is displayed during the jackpot. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the lottery result is decidedly displayed as a big win (the big win by the lottery of the first special pattern is started during the big win by the lottery of the second special pattern). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to ON when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special design is a big hit in the second special design fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) ( See S1214 in FIG. 100). In addition, after the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on and the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the process of S712 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) is executed first. is set to off. When the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set from ON to OFF, the temporary stop is released, and the fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is restarted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When the second fluctuation stop flag 203aj is turned on, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and when it is turned off, the temporary stop is canceled and the fluctuation display is restarted. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to ON when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special design is a big hit in the first special design fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) (Fig. 97 S714), after the big hit by lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is set to OFF in the processing of S1212 of the second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) that is executed first.

In the fourth embodiment, even when one of the special symbols is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to a big hit, the lottery result of the other special symbol is not rewritten as lost, and the result of the lottery is held as it is. Then, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display corresponding to the jackpot has passed and the jackpot is started, the corresponding flag of the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai or special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is turned on. By doing so, the other variable display is temporarily stopped during the big win. After the big win, the temporary stop is released and the variable display is restarted. By constructing in this way, when one special symbol lottery results in a big win and the other special symbol lottery results in a big win during the variable display, the other special symbol lottery results in a big win based on the one special symbol lottery. It is possible to prevent the big win based on the lottery of special symbols from being started, and to start the big wins based on the lottery of both special symbols at different timings. Therefore, it is possible for the player to have an advantage over the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments, in which there is a possibility that even if a big win is made, it will be rewritten as a loss.

The variable probability flag 203ak is provided instead of the variable probability counter 203g in each of the above embodiments. In this embodiment, the variable probability state continues until the falling lottery results in a lottery result corresponding to falling. In other words, the number of lotteries of special symbols until the probability variation state ends is undefined. Therefore, depending on whether or not the variable probability flag 203ak is ON, it is configured to indicate whether or not it is in the variable probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a specific example of the correspondence relationship between the game state and the scenario in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state after the end of the big win and the variation pattern table to be referred to when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big win P (4-round big win).

As shown in FIG. 94, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the big win P, the game state after the big win is set to the probability variable state. In the variable state, the probability of winning a big hit in the special pattern lottery is increased, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shortened (30 seconds → 3 seconds), and the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased (1/240 → 1/1.2), and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a in the case of winning the normal symbol becomes longer (0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times). Therefore, by hitting to the right, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the advantageous second special symbol can be executed efficiently.

Also, as shown in FIG. 94, when the gaming state after the big hit P is set to the probability variable state (the probability variable state is given), as a variation pattern scenario, the lottery of special symbols 1 to 50 times after the big hit A variation pattern scenario (see FIG. 92(b)) is set in which the table 202d4 for variable probability application is referred to.

When the lottery result corresponding to the falling occurs when the lottery for the special pattern is executed 30 times, the state is shifted to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 94, even if the game shifts to the normal state, the set variation pattern scenario does not change, so the table 202d4 for probability variation granting is referred to until the lottery of special symbols is completed 50 times. That is, the long variation (120 seconds) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed over 20 special symbol lotteries after falling. As described above, in the normal state, even if the player hits right, the second special symbol lottery is rarely executed, and hitting left is more advantageous. Then, as described above, each time a ball enters the sorting unit 660 that can enter the ball when hitting left, the sorting member 900 provided therein causes the first ball entrance 64 and the central first ball to enter. The ball is alternately distributed to the two entrances 640c (see FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b)). In this case, when the probability variation grant time table 202d4 is referred to, while the first special symbol is set to long variation, the simultaneous variation method displays the second special symbol multiple times (the second special symbol lottery) can be executed. That is, since the lottery of the 2 special symbols can be overemphasized, the player's expectation for the variable probability state can be enhanced.

Also, as shown in FIG. 94, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot P exceeds 50 times, the normal table 202d1 is referred to according to the set variation pattern scenario. switch. That is, when a left-hand shot is made, a disadvantageous state occurs in which the lottery for the first special symbol that is disadvantageous and the lottery for the second special symbol that is advantageous are equally performed.

In this way, after the jackpot in which the probability variable state is granted, if the state falls to the normal state (the state in which the left-handed hit is advantageous) in 30 times, even if the left-handed hit is performed, the special symbol lottery will be performed in the advantageous second. 2 It is possible to overemphasize the lottery of special symbols. Therefore, when falling to the normal state in the falling lottery within 50 times after setting the variable probability state, the game is played in a relatively advantageous state until the lottery of the special pattern is executed 50 times. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's motivation for the game even when the variable probability state falls to the normal state at an early stage.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 102. FIG. First, the first special symbol variation start process 5 (S211) executed instead of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) will be described. This first special symbol variation start process 5 (S211) is similar to the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the lottery result of the first special symbol This is a process for setting a corresponding variation pattern.

Of the first special symbol variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment, in each of S301 to S304 and S322, S301 to S304 of the first special symbol variation start processing in the second embodiment respectively , and S322 are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment, after the process of S304 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the variation number counter 203ab (S331), and the first special symbol A first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 for determining whether or not a jackpot will be achieved in the lottery of (S332) is executed, and the process proceeds to S322.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S332) will be described. This first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S332) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Among the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 5 (see FIG. 96) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S501 to S504 and S510, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31) ) are executed in steps S501 to S504 and S510.

Also, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation is in progress (probability variation flag 203ak is ON) in the process of S502 (S502: Yes), The value of the fall lottery counter is compared with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202g (S511), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random number value corresponding to the fall ( (S512).

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to falling (S512: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state by setting the variable probability flag 203ak to OFF (S513), and the falling ( (S514). Next, with reference to the first winning random number table 202a for the low-probability time, the lottery result as to whether or not it is a big win is obtained (S504), and the process proceeds to S516. On the other hand, in the process of S512, if the lottery result does not correspond to falling (S512: No), the process proceeds to S503, and the first winning random number table 202a for high probability is referred to for the big win. The lottery result of whether or not is obtained (S503), and the process proceeds to S516.

In the process of S516, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S515), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S515: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot ( S516), the jackpot symbol is set as the symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S517), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S515, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big win (S515: No), the process proceeds to S510.

In this way, by executing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96), it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is achieved by considering the result of the drop lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S212) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S212). This first special symbol variation stop process 5 (S212) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for stopping and displaying the symbols during variation when the variation time of the special symbols has passed.

Among the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S701 to S703, S706, S709, and S710, in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) The same processes as the processes of S701 to S703, S706, S709, and S710 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33) are executed.

Also, when the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) in the fourth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203ai is on (S711), and it is on If it is determined (S711: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) of this time is the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) executed first after the big hit. Also, it means that the variable display of the first special symbol was temporarily stopped during the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, along with setting the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai to off (S712), special figure 1 for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai was set to off A fluctuation stop command is set (S713), and this processing ends. By executing the processing of these S712 and S713, the first and third symbols that have been temporarily stopped in the first and third symbol display devices 37 and 81 can be displayed again in a variable manner. . This variable display is variably displayed by the remaining variable time obtained by subtracting the time elapsed before the start of the big win from the set variable time.

In the process of S711, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is off (S711: No), each process of S701 to S703 is executed. Then, in the process of S703, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S703: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to ON (S714), and the special figure 2 fluctuation Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 that the stop flag 203aj is set to ON (S715). As a result, while the jackpot won in the first special symbol lottery is being executed, the first symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The third symbol can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the second special symbol from ending during the big win, so that the symbol indicating the lottery of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed during the big win, and the player cannot concentrate on the big win. You can prevent it from being lost.

After the processing of S715, the start of the jackpot is set (S706), the values of the probability variation flag 203ak and the time saving medium counter 203r are reset (S716), and the processing proceeds to S709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, details of the second special symbol variation start process 5 (S213) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This second special symbol variation start process 5 (S213) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). Like the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) in the embodiment (and the first embodiment), it is a process for setting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

Of the second special symbol variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 98) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S901 to S904 and S922, S901 to S904 of the second special symbol variation start processing in the second embodiment respectively , and S924 are executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98) in the fourth embodiment, after the process of S904 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the variation number counter 203ab (S931), and the second special symbol A second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 for determining whether or not a jackpot will be won in the lottery is executed (S932), and the process proceeds to S924.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, details of the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S932) will be described. This second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S932) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in the fourth embodiment, in each process of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to SS1010, the second special symbol jackpot determination process in the first embodiment (Fig. 36), and the same processes as those of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1010 are executed.

Also, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation is in progress (probability variation flag 203ak is ON) in the process of S1002 (S1002: Yes), The value of the fall lottery counter is compared with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202g (S1011), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random number value corresponding to the fall ( (S1012).

In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to falling (S1012: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state by setting the variable probability flag 203ak to OFF (S1013), and the falling ( (S1014). Next, with reference to the first winning random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result indicating whether or not the winning is a big win is obtained (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1006. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, if the lottery result does not correspond to falling (S1012: No), the process proceeds to S1003, and the first winning random number table 202a for high probability is referred to for the big win. The lottery result of whether or not is obtained (S1003), and the process proceeds to S1006.

In this way, by executing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99), it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is achieved by considering the result of the drop lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the details of the second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S214) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S214). This second special symbol variation stop process 5 (S214) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for stopping and displaying the symbols during variation when the variation time of the special symbols has passed.

Of the second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S1201 to S1203, S1206, S1208, and S1209, respectively in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) The same processes as S1201 to S1203, S1206, S1208, and S1209 of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38) are executed.

Also, when the second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) in the fourth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203aj is on (S1211), and it is on If it is determined (S1211: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) of this time is the first executed second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) after the big hit. Also, it means that the variable display of the second special symbol was temporarily stopped during the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, along with setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj to off (S1212), special figure 2 for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj was set to off A fluctuation stop command is set (S1213), and this processing ends. By executing the processing of these S1212 and S1213, the first and third symbols that have been temporarily stopped in the first and third symbol display devices 37 and 81 can be displayed again in a variable manner. . This variable display is variably displayed by the remaining variable time obtained by subtracting the time elapsed before the start of the big win from the set variable time.

In the process of S1211, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is off (S1211: No), each process of S1201 to S1203 is executed. Then, in the process of S1203, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (S1203: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to ON (S1214), and the special figure 1 fluctuation Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 that the stop flag 203ai is set to ON (S1215). As a result, while the jackpot won in the second special symbol lottery is being executed, the first symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The third symbol can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the first special symbol from ending during the big win, so that the symbols indicating the lottery of the first special symbol are stopped and displayed during the big win, and the player cannot concentrate on the big win. You can prevent it from being lost.

After the processing of S1215, the start of the jackpot is set (S1206), the values of the probability variation flag 203ak and the time saving medium counter 203r are reset (S1216), and the processing proceeds to S1208.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, details of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S121) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This normal symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process that is executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is a process for setting the propriety determination of the normal design and the variable display of the normal design when passing.

Among the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 101) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S1401 to S1416 and S1418 to S1423, the normal symbol variation processing in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) ( (see FIG. 40) are executed in steps S1401 to S1416 and steps S1418 to S1423. In addition, in the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 101) in the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S1414 and S1415, the present is not in the time saving state (S1414: No), or during the time saving state and during the jackpot (S1414: Yes, and S1415: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds x 1 time, and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S1432.

In the process of S1432, it is determined whether the time saving state is in progress (whether the value of the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more, or whether the probability variation flag 203ak is ON) (S1432), and in the time saving If it is determined that there is (S1432: Yes), the process of S1419 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1432, if it is determined that the time is not in the time saving state (S1432: No), 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol (S1433), and this processing ends.

Thus, in the fourth embodiment, in the normal state of the normal design, in addition to the probability of winning the normal design is greatly reduced, the fluctuation time of the normal design is significantly lengthened, and the normal design is hit. It is configured so that the opening time of the electric accessary product 640a is extremely short when it becomes. As a result, in the normal state, even if an irregular game method is executed in which the ball is always hit to the right in an attempt to execute the lottery for the advantageous second special symbol, the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加becomes extremely difficult, it is possible to increase the possibility of incurring a loss. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of suppressing the irregular game method in which the player always hits to the right.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, details of jackpot end processing 5 (S2141) executed instead of jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot end process 5 (S2141) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot end, like the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment.

In each of S2201, S2204 and S2206 of the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 102), S2201, S2204 and S2206 of the jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment respectively The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the jackpot end processing 5 (S2141) in the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S2201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ak is set to ON. (S2231), then, based on the values of the variable probability flag 2003ak and the time saving counter 203r, set a state command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the game state after the end of the jackpot (S2232), and proceed with the process. The process proceeds to S2206.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, when the game state after the big hit becomes the variable probability state, over the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times), the variable probability is given The hour table 202d4 is referred to. When this probability variation grant time table 202d4 is referred to, long variation (120 seconds) is selected when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, if you fall from the variable probability state to the normal state within a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) and return from right-handed to left-handed, multiple times during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the second special symbol A lottery can be run. That is, from the end of the big win until the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times), the second special symbol lottery is executed more often than the first special symbol lottery. easily advantageous situation. Therefore, even if the variable probability state falls to the normal state early (within a specific number of times) after the big win, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

In the fourth embodiment, a variation pattern scenario in which the number of lotteries of special symbols and the variation pattern table to be referred to are associated is set at the end of the big win, and is related to the timing of falling from the probability variation state to the normal state. Instead, the table 202d4 for variable probability giving is referred to only in the lottery of special symbols of a specific number of times after the end of the big hit, but it is not limited to this. For example, with the falling from the variable probability state to the normal state as a trigger, the table 202d4 for variable probability application may be referred to over the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). In this case, only when the number of special symbol lotteries executed before falling from the variable probability state to the normal state is, for example, within 20 times, a special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) after the fall. It may be configured to refer to the table 202d4 for probability variation granting over. By configuring in this way, when the variable probability state ends in a small number of times (for example, within 20 times), it is possible to provide an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Therefore, the player's motivation can be maintained even after the variable probability state ends. In addition, regardless of whether the player falls in the first falling lottery or the 20th falling lottery, the same advantageous state can be given the same number of times. In addition, it is possible to equalize the degree of advantage after that.

In the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the table 202d4 for the probability variation grant time only for the lottery of the special symbols of the specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the probability variation state is granted. , but not limited to these. For example, as in the first embodiment, when a small hit is made in the normal state, a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries (for example, 10 times) after the small hit is completed. A configuration may be adopted in which the variation pattern table is determined by referring to the table 202d4. As a result, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed while continuing left-handed hitting, so that it is possible to reduce the trouble of changing right-handed hitting and left-handed hitting in the normal state. Also, for example, as in the second embodiment, depending on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the disadvantageous state of determining the variation pattern table with reference to the normal table 202d1, A configuration may be adopted in which the table 202d4 is referred to and the advantageous state for determining the variation pattern is repeatedly switched. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the normal state from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the table 202d4 for the probability variation grant time only for the lottery of the special symbols of the specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the probability variation state is granted. , but not limited to these. For example, this control may be applied to the normal state. Specifically, when the time saving state is set after the big hit, after the time saving state ends, for example, after the lottery of special symbols is executed 50 times, a special symbol of a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) The variation pattern scenario table 202f may be configured so that the table 202d4 for probability variation granting is referred to over the lottery. Thus, even when the time-saving state ends without winning the jackpot, the game can be continued at least until the state in which the lottery of the second special pattern to be set after that is likely to be executed ends. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Also, for example, as in the first embodiment, a configuration in which a small hit can be selected in the lottery of the first special symbol, and a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) of special symbol lotteries after becoming a small hit It may be configured such that the table 202d4 for probability variation application is referred to. Thus, in a normal state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, the game can be shifted to an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed without changing the game state with the small win as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the normal state.

In the fourth embodiment, by referring to the probability variation grant time table 202d4, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, and left-handed and continuous When a ball enters the sorting unit 660, the frequency of the lottery of the first special symbol is reduced, but the configuration is to reduce the frequency of the lottery of the first special symbol. is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the sorting section 900 of the sorting unit 660 may be configured to be controllable by a motor or the like, and the direction may be electrically switched by the motor according to the number of balls that hit the sorting unit 660 . Normally, every time one ball enters the game, the motor is controlled so as to guide the ball in a direction different from the direction in which the ball was guided. On the other hand, within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times or 50 times) after being set to the variable probability state, the frequency that the ball is distributed (induced) to the central second ball entrance 640c as the arrangement of the distribution section 900 is higher than the frequency with which the ball is distributed to the first ball entrance 64 (for example, each time the ball is set to be guided to the central second ball entrance 640c five times in a row, the ball is sent to the first ball entrance 64 The motor may be controlled such that the motor is set once in a configuration that guides the By configuring in this way, the same effects as those of the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

In this embodiment, a distribution unit 660 that alternately distributes balls to the first ball entrance 64 and the central second ball entrance 640c is provided. (see FIG. 2). That is, a game in which the first ball entrance 64 is provided at a position where a ball can easily enter when hitting to the left, and the second ball entrance 640 is provided at a position where a ball can easily enter when hitting to the right. It may be applied to the board 13. In this case, as in the first embodiment, when the normal table 202d1 is selected, only super long variation (600 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol, and probability variation is given. After that, within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times or 50 times), during the time saving state, and during the probability variation state table 202d4 may be referred to. By configuring in this way, when falling from the variable probability state within the specified number of times, the execution frequency of the lottery of the first special symbol is reduced, and the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed more often, so that the lottery can be performed at an early stage. It is possible to seek relief for a player who has fallen into the ground.

In the above-described first, second, and fourth embodiments and the modification of the above-described first embodiment, a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and a special discharge flow path 65e1 is provided during the jackpot. By passing the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 provided downstream of the discharge channel 65e2, the game state after the big win is set to the variable probability state, but it is not limited to this. For example, according to the jackpot type, it may be a specification in which whether or not the game state after the jackpot is set to the variable probability state is predetermined. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified, so the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when a player hits right and a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, it is configured to make it easier to win a jackpot type in which an advantageous gaming state is likely to be set. The method of making it more advantageous than this is not limited to this. For example, if the lottery for the second special symbol executed by hitting the right hand results in a big win, it may simply be possible to easily win a big win type with a large number of rounds.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the updating of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r is configured to be executed at a stage before executing the determination of whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot, but it is limited to this is not. For example, it may be configured such that the various counters are updated after determining whether or not the game is a big win. As a result, it is not necessary to set a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of lotteries of special symbols for the counter value, so that it is possible to set parameters that are easier to understand.

In each of the above embodiments, the variable display of the first special symbol executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously. Although the simultaneous variation method that can be executed in parallel is adopted, it is not limited to this. For example, a method of executing only one variable display at a time may be adopted. In this case, the variable display may be performed one by one in the order in which the starting winnings are detected, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority. may be implemented. By configuring in this way, the control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

In the first embodiment, the chance mode A is always set (referring to the chance A table 202d3) when a small hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, and in the second and third embodiments, , Chance mode A is always set when the number of lotteries determined by the variation pattern scenario is reached, and in the fourth embodiment, when the probability variation state is given after the big hit, the specific number of times (20 times , or 50 times). For example, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether or not to refer to the chance A table 202d3 and the variable probability grant time table 202d4. More specifically, for example, in the case of a small hit in the first embodiment, or in the case of a predetermined lottery number of times in the variation pattern scenario in the second and third embodiments (shift to chance mode A condition is satisfied), a lottery (for example, a lottery to shift to chance mode A with a probability of 2/3) is performed to determine whether to shift to chance mode A, and only when the lottery is won, It is good also as a structure which transfers to chance mode A. FIG. Also, in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the variable probability state is granted after the big hit, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to refer to the table 202d4 for variable probability grant, and only when the lottery is won, After the jackpot, the table 202d4 for variable probability granting may be referred to over the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times). With this configuration, when the conditions for shifting to the chance mode A are met, the lottery result can be checked with interest, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, when a lottery is held, for example, the lottery probability may be varied depending on the time zone. Specifically, by electrically connecting an RTC (Real-Time Clock) for keeping time to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 and accessing the connected RTC, the main controller 110 The MPU 201 is configured so that the current time can be grasped. For example, in the morning time zone (eg, 10:00 AM to 12:00 AM) or in the evening time zone (eg, 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM), lotteries are more likely than other time zones. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability is kept high (2/3→9/10). By constructing in this way, it is possible to improve the operation during the time period when the probability of lottery is high. For example, the number of players who visit the hall can be increased. Therefore, the utilization rate of the hall can be improved.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is won, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a double-right product, a triple-right product, etc.) that increases the expected value of the jackpot until multiple (for example, 2 or 3) jackpot conditions occur, including that. may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, majang ball, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Depending on the result of one lottery, the degree of advantage of the other variation pattern is varied)
a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition; a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; Bonus game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination or the fact that the second determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, and a second determination based on the establishment of a specific condition A game machine having a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including one game state and a second game state more advantageous to a player than the first game state. Display means capable of displaying information, and first dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means on the display means; second dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the second determination by the second determination means; and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display, a plurality of predetermined dynamic display periods including at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period having a different degree of advantage for the player from the first dynamic display period When the first game state is set by the period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from among the periods and the game state setting means, the second dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means. a first setting means for setting a first selection state in which the rate of selection is lower than the rate of selection of the first dynamic display period; and when the first selection state is set by the first setting means, The period setting means selects the second dynamic display period based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means being a special determination result different from the specific determination result. and second setting means capable of setting a second selection state higher than the first selection state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. In such a game machine, when the winning state ends, either a normal state in which the winning state is drawn with a normal probability or a probability variable state in which the winning state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state. (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the normal state is set at the end of the winning state, the disadvantageous state in which the winning state is selected with a lower probability than the probability variation state is at least the next winning state. Therefore, there is a problem that the player's interest in the game cannot be improved when the normal state is reached.

Further, some of the above-described conventional gaming machines have a plurality of starting ports, and are capable of simultaneously and in parallel displaying symbols in a variable manner for each starting port. Furthermore, by varying the degree of advantage in the event of a win for each start opening at which a start prize is generated, the player is expected to win first with the variable display corresponding to the advantageous start opening. Some are designed to increase interest. In this conventional gaming machine, for example, when a win is achieved, the start winning to the starting opening with a low advantageous degree is more likely than the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the starting winning to the starting opening having a high advantageous degree. In some cases, the variable display based on the variable display is configured to have a longer variable time, and the variable display with a high degree of advantage can be executed more times during the long variable time.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the variation time is changed in response to a win, a disadvantageous situation occurs in which a variable display with a low degree of advantage is often performed unless a win is achieved. Therefore, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous until winning.

On the other hand, in the game machine A1, the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display execution means on the display means configured to display the identification information. The second identification information displayed and indicating the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display execution means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means, the first dynamic display period and the first dynamic display period have a degree of advantage for the player. One dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means from among a plurality of predetermined periods including at least different second dynamic display periods. A first selection state in which a rate of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means is lower than a rate of selecting the first dynamic display period based on the setting of the first game state by the game state setting means. is set by the first setting means. When the first selection state is set by the first setting means, the period is set based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means being a special determination result different from the specific determination result. The second setting means sets a second selection state in which the means selects the second dynamic display period at a higher rate than the first selection state.

Thus, at least in the first selection state, even if the first determination does not result in a specific determination result, the special determination result can be obtained, so that the degree of advantage when the second determination is executed can be varied. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous at least in the first game state.

selection means for selecting, from among a plurality of periods, a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means in the gaming machine A1; The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that a ratio of selecting each of the plurality of periods is the same between the selection state and the second selection state.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is selected from among a plurality of periods by the selection means. In the first selection state and the second selection state, each of the plurality of periods is selected at the same rate by the selection means.

Thus, when the first discrimination results in a special lottery result, the advantage degree when the second discrimination is executed is made different without changing the advantage degree when the first discrimination is executed. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the first game state.

A gaming machine A3 characterized in that the second dynamic display period in the gaming machine A1 or A2 is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the second dynamic display period is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. In this state, the game can be played with the expectation that the first determination will result in a special determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the first game state.

As the types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type selection means is provided with a type selection means for selecting one type of the privilege game from among a plurality of types including The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the second dynamic display period is shorter than the first dynamic display period, so that the ratio of selecting the second privilege game is high when it becomes true.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, the category is selected from among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. One type is selected by the means. Compared to the first determination, when the second determination results in a specific determination result, the type selection means selects the second privilege game at a higher rate. The second dynamic display period is shorter than the first dynamic display period.

As a result, when the second selection state is set due to the special determination result obtained by the first determination, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second determination is shortened. can be shortened. Therefore, when a specific determination result is obtained, the second determination that the advantageous second privilege game is likely to be selected is likely to be executed. A game can be played in the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A4 is provided with a timing means for timing the timing information, and the second setting means determines that the timing information clocked by the timing means is within a predetermined range and the determination result of the first determination is the special The game machine A5 is characterized in that the second selection state is set based on the determination result.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the clock information is clocked by the clock means. The second selection state is set by the second setting means when the time information measured by the time measuring means is within a predetermined range and the determination result of the first determination is the special determination result.

As a result, there is an effect that the advantage degree of the first game state can be varied according to the clock information clocked by the clock means.

A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball into a game area based on an operation of a player in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a first path through which the game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, and the first path a second path different from the first path and a first ball entry means arranged on the first path and capable of allowing a game ball to enter; and a second ball entry means arranged on the second path and capable of allowing a game ball to enter; The first condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second condition is that the game ball enters the second ball entering means. A game machine A6 characterized by being established based on.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game ball is shot by the shooting means to the game area based on the player's operation, and a first path through which the game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, and a second path different from the first path. is provided in the game area. A first condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a second condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means.

As a result, the game ball is shot to the second path in a state in which the dynamic display period with a high degree of advantage is likely to be selected by the period selection means, and conversely, the dynamic display period with a high degree of advantage is selected by the period selection means. In a difficult state, the game ball can be shot to the first path. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of changing the shooting direction of the game ball, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

A normal dynamic display period and a normal dynamic display period as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display executing means in any one of the game machines A1 to A6 a selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from among a plurality of periods including at least a special dynamic display period different from the second dynamic display period; The normal dynamic display period is advantageous for users, and the normal dynamic display period is set when the first determination results in the specific determination result, or when an outlier determination result different from the specific determination result and the special determination result is obtained. The special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means when the first determination results in the specific determination result or the special determination result. A gaming machine A7 characterized by:

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display executing means is the normal dynamic display period and the special dynamic display period different from the normal dynamic display period. One dynamic display period is selected by the selection means from among a plurality of periods including at least The second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. The normal dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means when the first determination results in a specific determination result, or when an outlier determination result different from the specific determination result and the special determination result is obtained. . On the other hand, when the first determination results in a specific determination result or a special determination result, the special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means.

Thus, when the special dynamic display period is selected, the privilege game is executed, or the second dynamic display period is more likely to be selected by the period selection means, so that the special dynamic display period is selected. There is an effect that the player can be pleased when the player recognizes the fact.

As the types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in the gaming machine A7, there are a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. As the type of the second selection state set by the type selection means for selecting one type of the privilege game from among and the second setting means, the second selection state is set over the second determination of the first number of times It is possible to select at least a small selection state in which the selection state is set and a multi-selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination a second number of times larger than the first number of times. Based on the selection of the dynamic display period by the state type selection means and the selection means, an effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect within the dynamic display period, and the special effect executed by the effect executing means. an effect selection means capable of selecting at least a normal effect and a special effect different from the normal effect as the predetermined effect corresponding to the dynamic display period, wherein the special effect is specified by the first determination; and when the first privilege game is determined by the type selection means, and when the special determination result is obtained by the first determination, and the multi-selection state is selected by the state type selection means The game machine A8 is characterized in that it is selected only in either case of being selected.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of privilege game is selected by the type selection means. As types of the second selection state set by the second setting means, a small selection state in which the second selection state is set over the first number of second determinations, and a second selection state in which the second selection state is set more than the first number of times The multi-selection state in which the second selection state is set over the number of times of the second determination can be selected by at least the state type selection means. Based on the selection of the dynamic display period by the period selection means, a predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means within the dynamic display period, corresponding to the special dynamic display period executed by the effect execution means. As a predetermined effect to be performed, at least a normal effect and a special effect different from the normal effect are selectable by the effect selecting means. The second privilege game is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. When the first determination results in a specific determination result and the type selection means determines the first privilege game, and when the first determination results in a special determination result and the state type selection means selects the multi-selection state. The special effect is selected by the effect selecting means only in either case.

As a result, in the dynamic display of the first identification information in which the special dynamic display period is set, when the player recognizes that the special effect is executed, the first privilege game is executed or the multiple selection is performed. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the state is set.

In the gaming machine A8, the second number of times is greater than the number of times of the first determination executed when a game is played using game balls that can be acquired by the player in the first privilege game. A gaming machine A9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the second number of times is the first bonus game that is executed when the player plays a game using game balls that can be acquired by the player in the first privilege game. Since the number of times is greater than the number of times of discrimination, it is possible to provide a novel game property that makes one expect that the first identification information indicating the specific discrimination result will not be displayed when the special performance is executed.

<Characteristic group B> (Chance zone after falling with 1 type and 2 types)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means period determination means for determining one dynamic display period from among a plurality of predetermined periods as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means and the dynamic display execution means; a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means, a game ball can enter the ball entering means, and a game ball enters the ball entering means from the first position a variable control means for varying the variable means that can be changed to the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and the variable control means for varying the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means; A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball entering the ball entering means enters a specific area provided inside the ball entering means, and its As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished, a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. game state setting means for setting one game state, counting means for counting the number of determinations executed by the determining means after the first game state is set by the game state setting means, and counting by the counting means. Based on the fact that the number of times displayed reaches a predetermined specific number of times, an advantageous period that is more advantageous to the player than other dynamic display periods is determined as the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means. Advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the ratio increases.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of the lottery executed based on the starting winning is winning, a winning state that is advantageous to the player is given (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392 Gazette). Among such conventional type game machines, it is possible to set either a normal state in which start-up winning is difficult to occur or a time-saving state in which start-up winning is more likely to occur than in the normal state, as the game state after winning. There is In addition, there is also a game machine having a ball entrance that increases the rate of game ball entry during the time-saving state. Inside this ball entrance, there is provided a specific area that triggers a winning state by allowing a game ball to enter. That is, during the time-saving state, a winning state is given when a win is won in a lottery based on the starting prize and when a ball enters a specific area, so it is an advantageous state compared to the normal state. becomes.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, only the above-mentioned two types of game states (normal state, time saving state) are generally provided (so-called variable probability state is not provided), and advantageous time saving state has ended, the most unfavorable normal state is set. In other words, when the most advantageous state ends, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for playing the game may be greatly reduced.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, it is variable between an open position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the first position. The means is variably configured. Based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means, the variable means is varied in a predetermined variable pattern by the variable control means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the game ball entering the ball entering means enters a specific area provided inside the ball entering means. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means is finished, one game state is selected from a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. is set by the game state setting means. The counting means counts the number of determinations executed by the determining means after the first game state is set by the game state setting means, and the number counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined specific number. Based on this, as the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means, the advantageous state setting means sets an advantageous state in which the determining ratio of the advantageous period which is more advantageous to the player than the other dynamic display periods is higher.

As a result, when the first game state having a lower degree of advantage than the second game state is set after the privilege game ends, the discrimination is executed a specific number of times with the aim of shifting to the advantageous state. The game can be continued at least until Therefore, when the first game state is set, there is an effect that the player's motivation for playing the game can be improved.

Based on the setting of the first game state in the gaming machine B1, the first disadvantageous state setting means and the advantageous state setting means for setting a disadvantageous state in which the determination ratio of the advantageous period is lower than the advantageous state Second disadvantageous state setting means for setting the disadvantageous state based on the first number of determinations by the determining means after the advantageous state is set, and the disadvantageous state is determined by the second disadvantageous state setting means. a second advantageous state setting means for setting the advantageous state based on a second number of determinations performed by the determining means after setting.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the setting of the first game state, the first disadvantageous state setting means sets a disadvantageous state in which the determination ratio of the advantageous period is lower than that of the advantageous state. A disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means based on the fact that the judgment means has performed the first number of determinations after the advantageous condition setting means has set the advantageous condition. The advantageous state is set by the second advantageous state setting means on the basis that the second number of judgments are executed by the judgment means after the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means.

Thereby, even if the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means ends, the game can be continued aiming at the advantageous state set by the second advantageous state setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation for superiority can be improved.

In the gaming machine B2, the second unfavorable state setting means performs the determination by the determining means the first number of times after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means or the second advantageous state setting means. The game machine B3 is characterized in that the disadvantageous state is set based on the fact that

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the determination by the determination means is performed the first number of times after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means or the second advantageous state setting means. Since the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means based on , the game state over the determination of the first number of times and the disadvantageous state over the determination of the second number of times can be alternately repeated. . Therefore, even if one advantageous state ends, the player can be encouraged to continue the game until the next advantageous state, so that the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the advantageous period is shorter than the unfavorable period determined by the period determining means when the number of times counted by the counting means is less than a predetermined specific number of times. A gaming machine B4 characterized by a period of length.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the number of times counted by the counting means is less than the predetermined specific number of times, the rate determined by the period determining means is higher than the disadvantageous period. Also, since the advantageous period is configured to have a short length, it is possible to make the judgment by the judging means to be executed at short intervals during the advantageous period. Therefore, there is an effect that the game efficiency can be improved when the advantageous state is set.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the privilege game executing means can execute the privilege game based on the special determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a privilege game is played by the privilege game execution means based on the special discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means. is executed, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation of a special determination result.

In the gaming machine B5, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball based on an operation of a player, a first path through which the game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the above-mentioned A first ball-entering means provided on the first path for allowing a game ball to enter, and a second ball-entering means provided for the second path for allowing a game ball to enter. A first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means and a second discrimination based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means. A game machine B6 characterized by comprising a second determination means for executing

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot by the shooting means based on the player's operation. A first path through which a game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, and a second path different from the first path are provided. The first path is provided with first ball entering means for allowing game balls to enter, and the second path is provided with second ball entering means for allowing game balls to enter. In the determination means, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Then, the second discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means.

As a result, the player can select whether to shoot the game ball through the first path or the second path, so that the game can be provided with a playability that matches the taste of each player. can.

In the gaming machine B6, the period determining means increases the ratio of determining the advantageous period as the dynamic display period when the determination by the second determining means is executed in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state is set. In the state where the determination is not made, when the determination by the second determination means is performed, the rate of determining the disadvantageous dynamic display period becomes higher than when the determination is performed by the first determination means. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that the first determination has a lower probability of becoming the specific determination result than the second determination.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the advantageous state, when the determination by the second determination means is executed, the rate of determination of the advantageous period by the period determination means increases. On the other hand, when the advantageous state is not set, the period determination means determines a disadvantageous dynamic display period that is more disadvantageous than the case where the determination by the first determination means is performed when the determination by the second determination means is performed. higher percentage determined by The first determination is configured to have a lower probability of a specific determination result than the second determination.

Thus, in an advantageous state, the game ball can be shot toward the second path, and in a state other than the advantageous state, the game ball can be shot toward the first path. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the shooting direction of the game ball according to the state.

A gaming machine B8 characterized in that the probability of obtaining the special identification result by the first identification in the gaming machine B7 is the same as the probability of obtaining the special identification result by the second identification.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the probability that the first determination results in a special determination result is the same as the probability that the second determination results in a special determination result. Therefore, when the game ball is shot aiming at the first path, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of a special determination result.

<Feature C group> (Simultaneous variation, variable variation time depending on the hold of the other special figure under certain conditions)
A first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and a first entering means based on the fact that the game ball entered the first ball-entering means. a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball information and acquiring second ball entry information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means; A first discriminating means for executing a first discrimination based on the first entering information and a second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination based on the second entering information acquired by the entering information acquiring means. 2 determining means, first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination, and display means capable of displaying second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination, and the first identification by the display means A first dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying information, a second dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the second identification information by the display means, and the While the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed, the second input acquired by the entering ball information acquisition means based on the fact that a game ball newly enters the second ball entering means A second ball entry information storage means capable of storing ball information at least until the second determination by the second determination means is performed, and the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display, one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods based on at least the number of the second ball entry information stored in the second ball entry information storage means. and period selection means for selecting a display period.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery executed based on winning (starting winning) to a starting hole provided on a game board is a winning, a winning state advantageous to the player is provided. (For example, JP-A-2006-000392). Some of these conventional game machines are provided with a plurality of starting holes, and the starting hole into which a ball is likely to enter can be changed according to the game state. In addition, in gaming machines with multiple starting holes, if an irregular game is played by aiming at a starting hole where it is difficult for a ball to enter, a penalty such as an extremely longer fluctuation time than usual is imposed. There are also things that can be done.

However, such a conventional gaming machine has a problem that the deterrent effect against irregular gaming methods is insufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the first ball entry information acquisition means acquires the first ball entry information based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, while the second ball entry means acquires the first ball entry information. Second ball entry information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball. Based on the first entering information acquired by the entering information acquisition means, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means, and based on the second entering information, the second discrimination means A second determination is performed. First identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination are displayed on the display means. Dynamic display of the first identification information is performed by the first dynamic display execution means, and dynamic display of the second identification information is performed by the second dynamic display execution means on the display means. Acquired by the entering ball information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball newly enters the second entering means while the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display executing means The second entry information is stored by the second entry information storage means at least until the second determination is performed by the second determination means. As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means, based on at least the number of second entry information stored in the second entry information storage means , one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods by the period selection means.

As a result, the frequency of the first discrimination by the first discriminating means varies according to the number of stored second ball entry information, so only the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information can be performed. In addition, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of stored pieces of the second ball entry information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the first dynamic display executing means, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed, displays the first identification information while the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed. A game machine C2 characterized by being capable of executing dynamic display of.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, when dynamic display of the second identification information is executed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed while the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed. Since the dynamic display of the first identification information can be executed by the display execution means, the first determination by the first determination means and the second determination by the second determination means can be executed more efficiently. effective.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the period selection means selects the second ball entry information storage means more than the second entry information storage means when at least one piece of the second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the rate of selecting an advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player increases when the second ball entry information is not stored.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second entering information storage is more efficient than when at least one second entering information is stored in the second entering information storage means. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the period selection means selects an advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player at a high rate. There is an effect that the game can be played without memorizing the entering ball information.

Privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a predetermined specific determination result in the first determination or the second determination in the gaming machine C3, and the privilege game As the type of the privilege game executed by the execution means, one of the privilege games selected from among a plurality of types including a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. selecting means capable of selecting a type, wherein the selecting means selects the specific determination result in the second determination rather than the specific determination result in the first determination. A game machine C4 characterized in that the ratio of selecting the second privilege game is high.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on a predetermined specific determination result in the first determination or the second determination, the privilege game executing means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player. As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of types including a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is selected by the selection means. A type of privilege game is selected. When the second determination results in a specific determination result, the selection means selects the second privilege game at a higher rate than when the first determination results in a specific determination result.

As a result, the player can play the game in anticipation of a specific determination result by the second determination means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A first game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination, and a second determination rather than the first game state as game states after the bonus game is completed in the gaming machine C4. and a game state setting means capable of setting at least a second game state in which is likely to be executed. A game machine C5 characterized in that the setting ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period is increased when it is not stored.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the end of the privilege game, a first game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination, and a second game state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than the first game state. The game state can be set by at least the game state setting means. In the first gaming state, when the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the period setting means is more likely to set the advantageous dynamic display period.

As a result, an irregular game method is executed in an attempt to execute the second determination in the first game state in which the first determination is likely to be performed, and the second ball entry information is stored in the second ball entry information storage means. When this is done, it becomes a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to set the advantageous dynamic display period.

One dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means in the gaming machine C5. A second period selection means is provided, and the second period selection means selects a disadvantageous dynamic display period disadvantageous to the player when the first game state is set rather than the second game state. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the value of the game machine C6 is high.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of periods predetermined by the second period selection means as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. selected. When the first game state is set, the second period selection means selects a disadvantageous dynamic display period disadvantageous to the player at a higher rate than the second game state.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method that attempts to execute the second determination in the first game state.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C6, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player and the first ball entering means are provided, and a first path through which the game ball can pass and the first ball entering means are provided. 2. A gaming machine C7 characterized by comprising a second path different from the first path, wherein two ball-entering means are provided.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the game ball is shot to the game area by the shooting means based on the player's operation. A first path through which a game ball can pass, and a second path different from the first path are provided in the game area.

As a result, the shooting direction can be changed according to the type of the ball-entering means that the player wants to enter, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic group D> (Make it difficult to execute one of the special figures 1 and 2)
A first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first ball entering means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entering means. a first determination means for performing determination, a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means, and a first determination by the first determination means; Or, based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means, the privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege executed by the privilege game execution means. As game states after the game is finished, there are a first game state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is set to a first probability, and a second game state in which a second probability is set to be higher than the first probability. and when the second game state is set by the game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least and a game state changing means for changing the game state from the second game state to the first game state based on a predetermined judgment result by the third judgment means. When the game state changing means changes to the first game state in a state where a specific condition is satisfied, the frequency of the first determination being executed by the first determination means is determined as the second determination. A gaming machine D1, further comprising: frequency suppressing means for suppressing the frequency of execution of the second determination by the means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a winning state that is advantageous to the player when winning is won in a lottery executed based on the starting ball entry. Among such conventional gaming machines, there are some which are set to a probability variable state in which the lottery probability of winning is higher than usual after winning. Furthermore, there is known a gaming machine that executes a lottery (falling lottery) to determine whether or not to shift from the variable probability state to the normal state together with a lottery to determine whether or not the player wins. In such a gaming machine, since it is difficult for the player to predict how long the variable probability state will continue, the player can play the game hoping that the variable probability state will continue for a longer time.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the variable probability state ends early (with a small number of lotteries), there is a problem that the player's motivation for playing the game may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first determination means executes the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. A second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the fact that the ball has been hit. Based on a specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination means or the second determination by the second determination means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished, a first game state in which the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is set to a first probability, and a second probability higher than the first probability. One game state can be set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least the second game state set to . When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the determination is executed by the third determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the predetermined determination result is obtained by the third determination means. Then, the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state by the game state change means. When the game state changing means changes to the first game state in a state where the specific condition is satisfied, the frequency of the first determination performed by the first determining means is reduced to the second determination by the frequency suppressing means. The frequency with which the second determination is performed by the means is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to vary the frequency of execution of the first determination depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied at the time of changing to the first game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the first discrimination means executes the first discrimination when a predetermined first discrimination condition is established after the game ball enters the first ball entering means. The second determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined second determination condition is satisfied after the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the frequency suppression means The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the predetermined first determination condition is controlled to be less likely to be satisfied than the predetermined second determination condition.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the first determination is executed by the first determination means when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied. After the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second determination is executed by the second determination means when a predetermined second determination condition is satisfied. The predetermined first determination condition is controlled to be less likely to be satisfied than the predetermined second determination condition by the frequency suppressing means.

As a result, the frequency with which the first discrimination is executed can be varied by varying the ease with which the predetermined first discrimination condition is established, so there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the game state setting means, when the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, the game after the executed privilege game is completed. The game machine D3 is characterized in that the ratio of setting the second game state as the state is high.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when a specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, after the executed privilege game is finished Since the second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state, the frequency of the second determination is suppressed by the frequency suppressing means. be advantageous for Therefore, when the game state is changed to the first game state while the specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

Display means capable of displaying identification information in any one of the game machines D1 to D3 and dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second determination on the display means dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is configured to be displayed on the display means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination on the display means are performed by the dynamic display execution means. executed.

As a result, even when dynamic display of one piece of identification information is being executed, dynamic display of the other piece of identification information can be executed, so that dynamic display of identification information can be executed more efficiently. has the effect of

In the gaming machine D4, the frequency suppressing means extends a start interval from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information to the start of the next dynamic display of the first identification information. A game machine D5 characterized in that it controls to

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the frequency control means controls the start interval from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information to the start of the next dynamic display of the first identification information to be longer.

As a result, the frequency with which the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed can be reduced, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A period for setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means in the gaming machine D4 or D5 from a plurality of predetermined periods. The setting means is provided, and the plurality of predetermined periods include at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period, and the frequency The suppression means sets a ratio of the second dynamic display period set by the period setting means as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information to be higher than that of the first dynamic display period, and As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information, a state is set in which the rate of selection of the first dynamic display period by the period setting means is higher than that of the second dynamic display period. A gaming machine D6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is set from a plurality of predetermined periods by the period setting means. The plurality of predetermined periods includes at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period. The ratio of setting the second dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the first identification information by the period selection means is higher than the first dynamic display period, and the dynamic display in the dynamic display of the second identification information As the period, the frequency suppressing means sets a state in which the rate of selection of the first dynamic display period by the period selecting means is higher than that of the second dynamic display period.

As a result, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the second identification information is likely to be shorter than the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the first identification information. There is an effect that the frequency of execution can be increased.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D6, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area based on an operation by a player, a first path through which the game balls shot by the shooting means can pass, and the first path A second path different from the second path and a game ball passing through the second path are provided at a position where the game ball can enter, and the second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the entrance of the game ball. The first ball entering means and the second ball entering means are arranged at a position where the game ball that has passed through the first path can be entered. In the first game state, a game ball that has passed through the second path is less likely to enter the third ball-entering means than in the second game state. When the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination, the ratio of setting the second game state as the game state after the end of the executed privilege game is higher than the determination of . A gaming machine D7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game ball is shot by the shooting means to the game area based on the player's operation, and a first path through which the game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, and a second path different from the first path. is provided. At a position where a game ball passing through the second path can enter, there is provided a third ball entry means for executing a second judgment by the second judgment means based on the entry of the game ball. . The first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means are arranged at positions where game balls that have passed through the first path can be entered. In the first game state, it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the second path to enter the third ball entering means as compared to the second game state. When a specific determination result is obtained by the second determination than by the first determination, the ratio of setting the second game state by the game state setting means as the game state after the executed privilege game is completed is higher. configured to be high.

As a result, when the second game state is set, it becomes easier to execute the second determination, which is advantageous by shooting the game ball to the second path. There is an effect that a game can be played expecting that the second game state will be set.

Passing means through which a game ball can pass in any one of the game machines D1 to D7, a first guidance state in which the game ball passing through the passing means is guided to the first ball entering means, and a second ball entering means is guided. Induction means that can be changed to a second induction state, and based on the fact that the game ball is guided to the first ball entering means by the induction means, the induction means is changed to the second induction state, and the game ball is moved to the above-mentioned A gaming machine D8, further comprising a variable means for changing the guiding means to the first guiding state based on being guided by the second ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is provided a passage means through which the game ball can pass. The guiding means is configured to be variable between a first guiding state for guiding the game ball passing through the passing means to the first ball entering means and a second guiding state for guiding to the second ball entering means. When the game ball is guided to the first ball-entering means by the guiding means, the guiding means is changed to the second guiding state by the variable means. On the other hand, the guiding means is changed to the first guiding state by the variable means based on the gaming ball being guided to the second ball entering means.

Thereby, every time the game ball passes through the passing means, the game ball can be alternately entered into the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, so that the frequency suppressing means executes the first discrimination. When the frequency of determination is not suppressed, there is an effect that the frequency of performing the first determination and the frequency of performing the second determination can easily become equal.

counting means for counting the sum of the number of times the first discrimination is executed and the number of times the second discrimination is executed in any one of the game machines D1 to D8, and the specific condition is the second game; The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that it is established when the count value counted by the counting means after the state is set is within a range equal to or less than a specific count value.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the counting means counts the total number of times the first determination is performed and the number of times the second determination is performed. A specific condition is established when the count value counted by the counting means after the second game state is set is within a range equal to or less than a specific count value.

As a result, the player can play the game by paying attention to the number of times the first discrimination and the second discrimination are executed until the game state is changed to the first game state, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to

A game machine Z1, wherein the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A game machine Z2, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine in any of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a ball is detected to enter a starting hole installed in a game area, the display device executes a variable display of special symbols, which is advantageous when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. There are some that are given a hit state. Some conventional gaming machines have a plurality of starting holes in the game area, and are intended to improve interest by having different starting holes that are easier to enter depending on the shooting direction of the ball (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2005-304932).
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 includes first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means. First ball entry information is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball means, and second ball entry information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. a ball information acquiring means; a first discriminating means for executing a first determination based on the first ball entering information acquired by the entering ball information acquiring means; a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the second entering information; first identification information indicating a determination result of the first determination; and a determination result of the second determination. display means capable of displaying the second identification information; first dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means; second dynamic display execution means for executing display; and while dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, a game ball is newly introduced into the second ball entering means. A second ball entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means based on the fact that a player has entered the ball is memorized at least until the second determination is made by the second determination means. As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the ball information storage means and the first dynamic display execution means, the second information stored in the second entry information storage means and period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from among a plurality of predetermined periods based on at least the number of stored pieces of entering information.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the first dynamic display executing means, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed, displays the second identification information. The dynamic display of the first identification information can be executed while the dynamic display of the information is being executed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the period selecting means stores at least one second entering information in the second entering information storage means. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the rate of selecting the advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player is higher than when the second ball entry information is stored. .
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, based on the predetermined specific determination result in the first determination or the second determination, the player and a first privilege game as a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. A selection means capable of selecting one of the types of the privilege game from among a plurality of types including the privilege game, and the selection means selects the specific determination result from the first determination. Also, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination, the ratio of selecting the second privilege game increases.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, wherein the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination as a gaming state after the privilege game is finished. A game state setting means capable of setting at least a game state and a second game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first game state, and the period setting means, in the first game state, When the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the setting ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period is increased.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the first ball entry information acquisition means acquires the first ball entry information based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, while the second entry information is acquired. Second ball entry information is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball means. Based on the first entering information acquired by the entering information acquisition means, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means, and based on the second entering information, the second discrimination means A second determination is performed. First identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination are displayed on the display means. Dynamic display of the first identification information is performed by the first dynamic display execution means, and dynamic display of the second identification information is performed by the second dynamic display execution means on the display means. Acquired by the entering ball information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball newly enters the second entering means while the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display executing means The second entry information is stored by the second entry information storage means at least until the second determination is performed by the second determination means. As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means, based on at least the number of second entry information stored in the second entry information storage means , one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods by the period selection means.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is being performed, the dynamic display of the second identification information Since the dynamic display of the first identification information can be executed by the first dynamic display execution means while the target display is executed, the first determination by the first determination means and the second determination by the second determination means are performed. 2 can be executed more efficiently.
According to the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 1 or 2, at least one second ball-entering information is stored in the second-ball-entering information storage means. When the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the period selection means is more likely to select an advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player than when the second ball entry information is stored. , the game can be played without storing the second ball entry information in the second ball entry information storage means.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on a predetermined specific determination result in the first determination or the second determination, the privilege game executing means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player. As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of types including a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is selected by the selection means. A type of privilege game is selected. When the second determination results in a specific determination result, the selection means selects the second privilege game at a higher rate than when the first determination results in a specific determination result.
As a result, the player can play the game in anticipation of a specific result of determination by the second determination means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the game state after the end of the privilege game, a first game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination, and a second game state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than the first game state. The game state can be set by at least the game state setting means. In the first gaming state, when the second ball entry information is not stored in the second ball entry information storage means, the period setting means is more likely to set the advantageous dynamic display period.
As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the second determination is intentionally performed in the first game state in which the first determination is likely to be performed.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 first ball entry port (first ball entry means in the fourth embodiment )
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
640c central second ball entrance (second ball entrance means in the fourth embodiment)
S503, S504 First discrimination means in the fourth embodiment
S511, S1012 Third Determination Means in Fourth Embodiment
S513, S1013 Game state changing means in the fourth embodiment
S608 Period selection means S609 First dynamic display execution means S706, S1206 Privilege game execution means in the fourth embodiment
S1003, S1004 Second determination means S1109 in the fourth embodiment Second dynamic display execution means S21-41 Game state setting means in the fourth embodiment

Claims (1)

a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means;
a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means;
Privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination becoming a predetermined first determination result. And, in a gaming machine having
a variable means capable of being varied between a first position at which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a second position at which a game ball is difficult to enter into the second ball entering means;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, a first control and a second control for variably controlling the variable means so that the game ball is more difficult to enter the second ball entering means than the first control. a control execution means for executing one of a plurality of controls including at least a control;
game state setting means for setting a first game state, which is a game state in which the first control is executed, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition;
update means capable of periodically updating a counter value of a specific counter related to a game at least in the first game state;
a third determination means for determining whether the counter value of the specific counter is a predetermined value based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
Possibility of executing the privilege game rather than the first game state based on the fact that the counter value of the specific counter is determined to be the predetermined value by the determination of the third determination means in the first game state. a game state changing means for changing to a second game state, which is a game state in which the second control is executed, wherein
The game machine is
When the game state changing means changes the game state from the first game state to the second game state in a situation where a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the specific condition is satisfied after the change. Even if a game ball enters the first ball entering means while the game ball is being played, the determination result of the first determination does not appear and the determination result of the second determination appears. can be,
When the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state by the game state change means under a situation where the specific condition is not established, a game ball enters the first ball entry means after the change. A gaming machine characterized in that the determination result of the first determination can appear when a ball is played.

Images